Home
        NEC N8406-023 Command Reference Guide
         Contents
1.        cmap enable disable    Enables or disables TACACS  authorization level mapping   The default value is disabled        usermap  lt 0 15 gt   user  oper admin none    Maps a TACACS  authorization level to this switch user level  Enter a  TACACS  authorization level  0 15   followed by the corresponding this  switch user level              On Enables the TACACS  server   Off Disables the TACACS  server  This is the default   Cur Displays current TACACS  configuration parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  90    IMPORTANT  If TACACS  is enabled  you must login using TACACS  authentication when connecting via  the console or Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS  Backdoor for console is always enabled  so you can connect using  notacacs and the administrator password even if the backdoor  telnet  or secure backdoor  secbd  are  disabled     If Telnet backdoor is enabled  telnet ena   type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS   checking  and use the administrator password to log into the switch  The switch allows this even if TACACS   servers are available     If secure backdoor is enabled  secbd ena   type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS  checking   and use the administrator password to log into the switch  The switch allows this only if TACACS  servers are  not available     NTP server configuration  Command   cfg sys ntp     NTP Server Menu   prisrv   Set primary NTP server address  secsrv   Set secondary NTP server address  intr
2.       This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine   The following table describes the SNMPv3 Community Table information     Table 13 SNMPv3 Community Table parameters             Field Description   Index Displays the unique index value of a row in this table    Name Displays the community string  which represents the configuration    User Name Displays the User Security Model  USM  user name    Tag Displays the community tag  This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a    command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command  responder application sends an SNMP trap     SNMPv3 Target Address Table information  Command   info sys snmpv3 taddr    Transport Addr Port Taglist Params    47 81 25 66 162 vlv2trap viv2param       This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information  which is stored in the SNMP engine     The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Address Table information     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  24    Table 14 SNMPv3 Target Address Table parameters                      Field Description  ame Displays the locally arbitrary  but unique identifier associated with this   snmpTargetAddrEntry    Transport Addr Displays the transport addresses    Port Displays the SNMP UDP port number    Taglist This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a  particular SNMP message    Params The value of
3.     ACL Re mark In Profile configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  re mark inprof     Re marking   In Profile Menu     uplp Set Update User Priority Menu    updscp Set the update DSCP    reset Reset in profile settings       cur Display current settings    Table 167 ACL Re mark In Profile Configuration Menu options          Command Description   uplp Displays the Re Mark In Profile Update User Priority Menu    updscp  lt 0 63 gt  Sets the DiffServ Code Point  DSCP  of In Profile packets to the selected value   reset Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values    Cure       Displays the current ACL re mark in profile parameters     ACL Re mark In Profile Update User Priority configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  re mark inprof uplp     Update User Priority Menu        value Set the update user priority    utosp Enable Disable use of TOS precedence    reset Reset in profile uplp settings          cur Display current settings    Table 168 ACL Update User Priority Configuration Menu options    Command  value  lt 0 7 gt     Description    Defines 802 1p value  The value is the priority bits information in the packet  structure        utosp enable disable    Enable or disable mapping of TOS  Type of Service  priority to 802 1p priority  for In Profile packets  When enabled  the TOS value is used to set the 802 1p  value  The default is disabled        reset    Resets UP1P settings to their default values        cur    Displays the
4.     EA L3 statistics   Max L3 table size  Number of L3 entries used    Max LPM table size  Number of LPM entries used    IP statistics    Command   stats 13 ip    IP statistics   ipInReceives        3647    ipInAddrErrors  90    ipInUnknownProtos     ipInDelivers   ipOutDiscards   ipDefaultTTL     4103  0  255             5 ipInHdrErrors  0  5  0 ipInDiscards  0  ipOutRequests  30974       The following table describes the IP statistics     Table 57 IP statistics       Statistics Description   ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces  including those  received in error    ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers  including       bad checksums  version number mismatch  other format errors  time to live exceeded   errors discovered in processing their IP options  and so on           ipInAddrErrors    The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header  destination field was not a valid address to be received at this switch  This count  includes invalid addresses  for example  0 0 0 0  and addresses of unsupported  classes  for example  Class E     For entities which are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams  this  counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a  local address        ipInUnknownProtos    The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded  because of an unknown or unsupported proto
5.    1     2     Connect to the switch console  After connecting  the login prompt displays           Blade Network Technologies 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch        Enter password           Enter admin as the default administrator password     The system displays the Main Menu with administrator privileges         Main Menu     info  stats  cfg  oper  boot  maint  diff  apply  save  revert  exit     gt  gt  Main     Information Menu   Statistics Menu   Configuration Menu   Operations Command Menu   Boot Options Menu   Maintenance Menu   Show pending config changes  global command   Apply pending config changes  global command   Save updated config to FLASH  global command   Revert pending or applied changes  global command   Exit  global command  always available           From the Main Menu  enter the following command to access the Configuration Menu        Main   cfg       The Configuration Menu is displayed            Configuration Menu     sys  port  12   13  qos  acl  rmon  pmirr  ufd  dump  ptcfg  gtcfg  cur            System wide Parameter Menu     Port Menu     Layer 2 Menu     Layer 3 Menu     QOS Menu     Access Control List Menu     RMON Menu     Port Mirroring Menu     Uplink Failure Detection Menu     Dump current configuration to script file     Backup current configuration to FTP TFTP server    Restore current configuration from FTP TFTP server    Display current configuration             Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol support    NOTE  SNMP support 
6.    Table 68 RIP Statistics                                                    Statistics Description   RIP packets received The total number of RIP packets received    RIP packets sent The total number of RIP packets transmitted    RIP request received The total number of RIP requests received    RIP response received The total number of RIP response received    RIP request sent The total number of RIP requests transmitted    RIP response sent The total number of RIP responses transmitted    RIP route timeout The total number of RIP route timeouts    RIP bad size packet received The total number of bad size RIP packets received    RIP bad version received The total number of RIP bad versions received    RIP bad zeros received The total number of RIP bad zeros  RIPv1 packets with non zero  unused fields  received    RIP bad source port received The total number of RIP bad source port received    RIP bad source IP received The total number of RIP bad source IP received    RIP packets from self received The total number of RIP packets from self received     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     76    Management Processor statistics    Command   stats mp     MP specific Statistics Menu     pkt  tcb  ucb  cpu    Show Packet stats   Show All TCP control blocks in use  Show All UDP control blocks in use  Show CPU utilization       The following table describes the MP specific Statistics Menu options     Table 69 MP specific Statistics Menu             
7.    ifoid  rbnum  intrval  owner  delet    Menu     set  Set    interface MIB object to monitor       set  set    Delet       cur       number of requested buckets    polling interval    owner for the RMON group of statistics    this history and restore defaults    Display current history configuration       The switch supports up to five History Groups     The following table describes the RMON History Menu options   Table 173 RMON History Menu options    Command    ifoid  lt 1 127 characters gt     Description    Configures the interface MIB Object Identifier  The IFOID must correspond to  the standard interface OID  as follows  1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 x  The interface OID can have a maximum of 127 characters        rbnum  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures the requested number of buckets  which is the number of discrete  time intervals over which data is to be saved   The range is from 1 to 65535  The default is 30        NOTE  The maximum number of buckets that can be granted is 50        intrval  lt 1 3600 gt     Configures the time interval over which the data is sampled for each bucket   The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds  The default value is 1800 seconds        owner  lt 1 127 characters gt     Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this history  index   The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters        delete    Deletes the selected history index        cur    Displays the current RMON History parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch 
8.    smalls    Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool  by the TCP IP protocol stack        smalls hi watermark    The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer  pool by the TCP IP protocol stack        failures    Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol  stack     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  77    TCP statistics    Command   stats mp tcb    All TCP allocated control blocks   10ad41e8  0 0 0 0 0  lt   gt  0 0 0 0 80 listen    10ad5790  47 81 27 5 1171  lt   gt  47 80 23 243 23 established       The following table describes the Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  control block  TCB  statistics shown in this                      example    Table 71 TCP statistics   Description Example statistic   Memory 10ad41e8 10ad5790  Destination IP address 0 0 0 0 47 81 27 5  Destination port 0 1171   Source IP 0 0 0 0 47 80 23 243  Source port 80 23   State listen established       UDP statistics    Command   stats mp ucb    All UDP allocated control blocks   161  listen    The following table describes the User Datagram Protocol  UDP  control block  UCB  statistics shown in this          example   Table 72 UDP statistics  Description Example Statistic  Control block 161  State listen       CPU statistics  Command   stats mp cpu    CPU utilization   cpuUtillSecond     cpuUtil4Seconds   cpuUtil64Second
9.   del    Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  94    Table 88 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options    Command    cur    Description  Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration     View based Access Control Model configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access  lt access number gt      SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu     name  model  level    rview  wview  nview  del  cur    Set group name   Set security model   Set minimum level of security   Set read view index   Set write view index   Set notify view index   Delete vacmAccess entry   Display current vacmAccess configuration             The view based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access  rights of the user  Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request    from an SNMP entity     The following table describes the User Access Control Configuration Menu options     Table 89 View based Access Control Configuration Menu options       Command Description   name  lt 1 32 Defines the name of the group  up to a maximum of 32 characters   characters gt    model Selects the security model to be used     usm snmpvl snmpv2       level  noAuthNoPriv authN  oPriv authPriv    Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights  The level  noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and  without usi
10.   force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut    OMAHA BP WNY    10  11  12  TS  14  15  16  17  18          Authenticator  disabled  1  Authenticator Backend  Auth Status E State Auth State       horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  thorized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali  horized initiali initiali                   Port down or disabled       The following table describes the IEEE 802 1x parameters     Table 21 802 1x information       Field Description  Port Displays each port   s name   Auth Mode Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port  The Authorization    mode can be one of the following   e  force unauth   e auto   e  force auth       Auth Status    Displays the current authorization status of the port  either authorized or  unauthorized        Authenticator PAE State       Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State  The PAE state can be
11.   lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address for your secondary DNS server  If the    primary DNS server fails  the configured secondary will be  used instead  Enter the IP address using dotted decimal  notation  For example  192 4 17 42       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  132    Table 149 Domain Name System  DNS  Configuration Menu options    Command Description  dname  lt dotted DNS notation gt  none Sets the default domain name used by the switch     For example  mycompany com  Displays the current Domain Name System  DNS  settings        cur    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  133    Bootstrap Protocol Relay configuration    Command   cfg 13 bootp     Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu   addr   Set IP address of BOOTP server  addr2 Set IP address of second BOOTP server    on Globally turn BOOTP relay ON  off Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF  cur Display current BOOTP relay configuration          The Bootstrap Protocol  BOOTP  Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a DHCP  server  The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two  DHCP BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on this switch     BOOTP relay is turned off by default   The following table describes the BOOTP Configuration Menu options   Table 150 BOOTP Configuration Menu options                Command Description   addr  lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address of 
12.   qweight   Set weight to a COS queue  cur   Display current 802 1p configuration       This feature provides the switch the capability to filter IP packets based on the IEEE 802 1p bits in the packet s  VLAN header  The 802 1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them  The  packets with a higher  non zero  priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower  priority bits value     The following table describes the 802 1p Configuration Menu options     Table 159 802 1p Configuration Menu options  Command Description  priq  lt 0 7 gt   lt 0 1 gt  Maps the 802 1p priority of to the Class of Service queue  COSg  priority  Enter    the 802 1p priority value  0 7   followed by the Class of Service queue  0 1  that  handles the matching traffic           qweight  lt 0 1 gt   lt 0 15 gt  Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue  COSq   Enter the  queue number  0 1   followed by the scheduling weight  0 15    cur Displays the current 802 1p parameters     Access Control configuration  Command   cfg acl     ACL Menu   acl   Access Control List Item Config Menu       group   Access Control List Group Config Menu  cur   Display current ACL configuration       Use this menu to create Access Control Lists  ACLs  and ACL Groups  ACLs define matching criteria used for IP  filtering and Quality of Service functions     The following table describes the Access Control Configuration Menu options     Ta
13.   speed convergence  When enabled  Triggered Updates force a router to  send update messages immediately  even if it is not yet time for the  update message  The default value is enabled        mcast disablelenable    Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table  using  address 224 0 0 9   The default value is enabled        default  none listen supply both    When listen  the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers   but gives them lower priority than configured default gateways  When  supply  the switch sends RIP default routes to other routers  When both   the switch operates as both  listen  and  supply   When none  the  switch rejects RIP default routes  The default value is none        metric  lt 1 15 gt     Configures the route metric  which indicates the relative distance to the  destination  The default value is 1        auth none password    Configures the authentication type  The default is none        key  lt key gt  none    Configures the authentication key password              enable Enables this RIP interface   disable Disables this RIP interface  This is the default   cur Displays the current RIP configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  123    RIP Route Redistribution configuration    Command   cfg 13 rip redist fixed static ospf eospf     RIP Redistribute Fixed Menu     add    rem  export    cur    Add rmap into route redistribution list       Remove rmap from route redistribution list    
14.  13 igmp       rxIgmpValidPkts   rxIgmpGenQueries   rxIgmpleaves   txIgmpReports   txIgmpLeaves        rxIgmpInvalidPkts   rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries   rxIgmpReports   txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries        This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups     The following table describes the IGMP statistics   Table 64 IGMP statistics          Statistic Description  rxIgmpValidPkts Total number of valid IGMP packets received  rxIgmpInvalidPkts Total number of invalid packets received       rxIgmpGenQueries    Total number of General Membership Query packets received       rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries    Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups       rxIgmp    Leaves    Total number of Leave requests received       rxIgmpReports    Total number of Membership Reports received       txIgmpReports    Total number of Membership reports transmitted       txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries    Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups          tx Igmp       Leaves    Total number of Leave messages transmitted    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     71    OSPF statistics menu    Command   stats 13 ospf     OSPF stats Menu   general   Show global stats    aindex   Show area s  stats  Lf   Show interface s  stats       The following table describes the OSPF statistics menu options     Table 65 OSPF statistics menu options             Command Usage   general Displays OSPF
15.  18  18  18  18  18             Interval Type rLimit fLimit E E last value    abs  abs  abs  abs  abs  abs 5634454  abs  abs  abs    abs             DO BR  O   OD OO O DO O      Oo Oa       GLO OO Oa 00 0   10 O          A LES IZ ALE  EA A AO A AS                WW 0D 60D 0  0 Y  0  0 wo Ww   gt O GTO 0O 0 AAA ND DVD DW       MN NY NY NY NY NY NH NM KN       MN NY NB NY NY NY NY NM NH  NM NN NBN NY NY NY NH NM NH  TOO DN OF WN F Oo          The following table describes the RMON Alarm Information parameters     Table 42 RMON Alarm Information Menu  info rmon alarm                                  Command   Index Displays the index number that identifies each alarm instance    Interval Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling  thresholds    Type Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be  compared against the thresholds  as follows   abs  absolute value  the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds  at the end of the sampling interval   delta  delta value  the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the  current value  and the difference compared with the thresholds    rLimit Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic    fLimit Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic    rEvtldx Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed    fEvtldx Displays the fa
16.  36 Wed Apr 23  2006    New download will replace image2 with file  1 0 1 0S img   from TFTP server 192 168 2 4    Confirm download operation  y n   y   Invoking TFTP over port 69      Starting download      File appears valid   Download in   progress   Image download complete  1333953 bytes    Writing to flash   This takes about 90 seconds  Please wait   Write complete  1333953 bytes   now verifying FLASH      Verification of new image2 in FLASH successful    image2 now contains Software Version 1 0 1   Switch is currently set to boot software imagel    Do you want to change that to the new image2   y n  y   Next boot will use new software image2        Selecting a software image to run    You can select which software image  image1 or image2  you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot     1  At the Boot Options  prompt  enter     Boot Options  image    2  Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot  The system informs you of which  image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset  and prompts you to enter a new choice     Currently set to use switch software  imagel  on next reset        Specify new image to use on next reset   imagel   image2             N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  156    Uploading a software image from the switch    You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server   1  At the Boot Options  prompt  enter     Boot Options  ptimg    2  The system prompts
17.  Current bridge configuration   The following table describes the Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options     Table 112 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options    Command Description   prior  lt 0 65535 gt  Configures the bridge priority  The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the  network is the STP root bridge   To make this switch the root bridge  configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches  and bridges on your network  The lower the value  the higher the bridge priority  The range is  0 to 65535  and the default is 32768   RSTP MSTP  The range is 0 to 61440  in steps of 4096  0  4096  8192      and the default is  32768   This command does not apply to MSTP  See the    Common Internal Spanning Tree  configuration    section for more information    hello  lt 1 10 gt  Configures the bridge hello time  The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits  a configuration bridge protocol data unit  BPDU    Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value  The range is 1 to 10  seconds  and the default is 2 seconds   This command does not apply to MSTP  See the    Common Internal Spanning Tree  configuration    section for more information    mxage  lt 6 40 gt  Configures the bridge maximum age  The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum  time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it  reconfigures the STP network  The range is 6 to 40 seconds  and t
18.  Group     RMON Information Menu    Command   info rmon     RMON Information Menu   hist   Show RMON History group information  alarm   Show RMON Alarm group information  event   Show RMON Event group information  dump   Show all RMON information          The following table describes the RMON Information parameters     Table 40 RMON History Information Menu  info rmon hist             Command Usage   hist Displays the RMON History Information menu   alarm Displays the RMON Alarm Information menu   event Displays the RMON Event Information menu   dump Displays all RMON Information parameters     RMON history information    Command   info rmon hist    RMON History group configuration        The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters     Table 41 RMON History Information Menu  info rmon hist             Command Usage   Index Displays the index number that identifies each history instance    IFOID Displays the MIB Object Identifier    Interval Displays the time interval for each for each sampling bucket    Rbnum Displays the number of requested buckets  which is the number of data slots into which data is to be  saved        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  50    Table 41 RMON History Information Menu  info rmon hist    Command  Gbnum    Usage  Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold sampled data     RMON alarm information    Command   info rmon alarm    RMON Alarm group configuration     9   3  18  18  18 
19.  OMA OA a a de fms cL ts toe eh Le tee ta 46  Routing Information Protocol information       oooocccnonccncccnonccnaonnnnnnnonon cn nn nc non corn nn nan n ran n rra rre 46  RIP Routes INTOFMALION A vckhics sche h bak fo  Ged okt tldnd ablando Sab oak ed ghd bedhead died did dud ALLE Sh lie e dais 46  FIP USEF COMMOUATION  tii 46  IP MAMA oi ld ated ln dd 47  IGMP multicast group information       oooocccnnnccnonccnnonnnonanononcn nn nn nono non nn rra nr nana nn n rre 47  IGMP multicast router port information       ooooconccnnnncnnnanononnnnnononann conan ccoo non n nn rn nn nr ren rra nena n nr nnnr nn nena rra rana 48  NMARP IO Malicia o A acid 48  COSMO MAIN a O e e iS 49  BOLA E 49  AGLINTOrMAlON scudo cua beta Cenit E ved Cae Been Euro Luts Cirsa Rots Era E et A Cus Leet eee a E 50  RMON  Information  MR aaa 50  RMON history InformMatiON tricolor e a a aaa aa 50  RMON    alarm  o aO a a aa a te Cee A Cres EE ts Core Edd da E 51  RMON  EVEN OMAN E E E E EE E N E 52  Links sStatuS IntorMmatO T a a a a aa a a We a aa aaa 52  POMIIMLOPratlOm x25 sesh EE EEE EEE e See E T EE 53  Logical Portto GEA  Port Mapping   i aioi eaa nien aaan aeaieie RAe aa cesecphscetesotssubecehecdueshaacghececceledphfynedetete 54  SEP information A E A E A EAN E EASE AAE Md aol AE 54  Uplink Failure Detection information               ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeecaaeeeeccaeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeesecaeeeeseneeeeseneeeess 55  IMPOrMAtON GUM P regis ced Yececed detec syaescecsiads aia 
20.  Operations level port 802 1x options are used to temporarily set 802 1x parameters for a port  This menu is  available only from an administrator login     Table 184 Operations Level Port 802 1x Menu options    Command    reset    Description   Re initializes the 802 1x access control parameters for the port  The following actions   take place  depending on the 802 1x port configuration    e force unauth  the port is placed in unauthorized state  and traffic is blocked    e auto  the port is placed in unauthorized state  then authentication is initiated    e force auth  the port is placed in authorized state  and authentication is not  required        reauth    Re authenticates the supplicant  client  attached to the port  This command only applies  if the port   s 802 1x mode is configured as auto     Operations level VRRP options    Command   oper vrrp     VRRP Operations Menu     back      Set virtual router to backup    Operations level VRRP options are described in the following table     Table 185 Operations Level VRRP Menu options    Command  back  lt 1 255 gt     Description   Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode  This is   generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred   switch has been returned to service after a failure  When this command is executed  the   current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising   its own priority level as O  lowest   Aft
21.  P2P2    ESG 8000 00 00 01 00 19 00 8018 P2P       Oo0o000000000Oo  o00000000000o          The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  RSTP  or the IEEE 802 1s  Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  MSTP   If RSTP MSTP is turned on  you can view the following RSTP bridge  information for the Spanning Tree Group      Status of Uplink Fast  upfast      Current root MAC address     Path Cost     Port     Hello interval     Maximum age value     Forwarding delay     Aging time   You can also refer to the following port specific RSTP information       Port number and priority      Cost     State     Role     Designated bridge and port    Link type    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  35    The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode     Table 233 Rapid Spanning Tree parameter descriptions    Parameter  Current Root    Description    Shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree  Information includes the  priority  hex  and MAC address of the root        Path Cost    Path cost is the total path cost to the root bridge  It is the summation of the path cost  between bridges  up to the root bridge         Port    The current root port refers to the port on the switch that receives data from the current  root  Zero  0  indicates the root bridge of the STP        Priority  bridge     The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP  root brid
22.  Remote Monitoring  RMON  statistics of the selected port   Table 52 RMON statistics          Statistic Description   etherStatsDropEvents The total number of packets received that were dropped because of  system resource constraints    etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data  including those in bad packets     received on the network  excluding framing bits but including  FCS octets                        etherStatsPkts The total number of packets  including bad packets  broadcast packets   and multicast packets  received    etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to the  broadcast address    etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to a  multicast address    etherStatsCRCAlignErrors The total number of packets received that had a length  excluding    framing bits  but including FCS octets  of between 64 and 1518 octets   inclusive  but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence  FCS  with an  integral number of octets  FCS Error  or a bad FCS with a non integral  number of octets  Alignment Error     etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long    excluding framing bits but including FCS octets  and were otherwise well   formed    etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets    excluding framing bits but including FCS octets  and were otherwise well   formed    etherStatsFragments 
23.  Reset all fields   Display current parameters          This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL  The following table describes the Ethernet    Filter Configuration Menu options     Table 162 Ethernet Filter Configuration Menu options    Command    Description    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  141    Table 162 Ethernet Filter Configuration Menu options       Command Description   smac  lt MAC address gt   lt MAC mask gt  Defines the source MAC address and MAC mask for this ACL  For  example   00 60 cf 40 56 00 ff ff ff ff ff fc   dmac  lt MAC address gt   lt MAC mask gt  Defines the destination MAC address and MAC mask for this ACL   For example     00 60 cf 40 56 00 ff ff ff ff ff fc  vlan  lt 1 4095 gt   lt VLAN mask  Oxfff  gt  Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL                    etype Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL   ARP IP IPv6 MPLS   RARP  any 0xXXXX   pri  lt 0 7 gt  Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL    reset Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values   cur Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL     ACL IP Version 4 Filter configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  ipv4     Filtering IPv4 Menu   sip   Set to filter on source IP address  dip   Set to filter on destination IP address    proto Set to filter on protocol  tos Set to filter on TOS  reset Reset all fields   cur Display current parameters       This menu allows you to 
24.  System Maintenance Menu   flags   Set NVRAM flag word    The System Maintenance Menu is reserved for use by NEC technical support  The options are used to perform  system debugging   The following table describes the System Maintenance Menu options     Table 187 System Maintenance Menu options    Command Usage  flags  lt new NVRAM flags word as Sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by  OXXXXXXXXX gt  NEC technical support     Forwarding Database options    Command   maint fdb     FDB Manipulation Menu     find Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  port Show FDB entries for a single port    vlan Show FDB entries for a single VLAN  dump Show all FDB entries  clear Clear entire FDB  then re add static entries       The Forwarding Database  FDB  Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address    from the Forwarding Database or clear the entire Forwarding Database  This is helpful in identifying problems  associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions     The following table describes the FDB Manipulation Menu options     Table 188 FDB Manipulation Menu options    Command Usage   find  lt MAC address gt    lt 1 4095 gt   Displays a single database entry by its MAC address  You are prompted  to enter the MAC address of the device  Enter the MAC address using  one of the following       XX XX XX XX XX XX format  for example  08 00 20 12 34 56   e     XXXXXXXXXXXX format  for example  080020123456                  p
25.  Table 96 Management Networks Configuration menu options   Command Description   add  lt IP address gt   lt IP mask gt  Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed  through Telnet  SNMP  or the browser based interface  A range  of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask  address  Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted   decimal notation           rem  lt IP address gt   lt IP mask gt  Removes a defined network  which consists of a management  network address and a management network mask address   cur Displays the current management networks parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  99    User Access Control configuration    Command   cfg sys access user     User Access Control Menu   uid   User ID Menu  eject   Eject user       usrpw   Set user password  user    opw Set operator password  oper    admpw Set administrator password  admin   cur Display current user status       The following table describes the User Access Control menu options     Table 97 User Access Control Configuration menu options       Command Description   uid  lt 1 10 gt  Displays the User ID Menu for the selected user    eject  lt user name gt  Ejects the selected user from the switch    usrpw  lt 1 128 Sets the user  user  password  maximum 128 characters   The user has no direct  characters gt  responsibility for switch management  He or she can view switch status information    and statistics  but cannot make any confi
26.  access the Configuration Menu     Main  cfg    3  From the Configuration Menu  use the following command to select the System Menu      gt  gt  Configuration  sys    4  Enter the following command to set the user password        System  access user usrpw    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     Enter the current administrator password at the prompt     Only the administrator can change the user password  Entering the administrator password confirms your  authority        Changing USER password  validation required          Enter current administrator password        Enter the new user password at the prompt        Enter new user password     Enter the new user password  again  at the prompt        Re enter new user password     Apply and save the changes     System  apply    System  save    Changing the default operator password    The operator manages all functions of the switch  The operator can reset ports or the entire switch  Operators can    only effect temporary changes on the switch  These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted reset   Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations  Because any changes  an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch  operators cannot severely impact switch operation     By default  the operator account is disabled and has no password  This password cannot be changed from the  operator account  Only the administrator has the ability to change pas
27.  arrow key    Recalls the previous command from the history list  This can be used multiple times to work  backward through the last ten commands  The recalled command can be entered as is  or  edited using the options below         lt Ctrl n gt  or  Down arrow key    Recalls the next command from the history list  This can be used multiple times to work  forward through the last ten commands  The recalled command can be entered as is  or  edited using the options below         lt Ctrl a gt     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line         lt Ctrl e gt     Moves cursor to the end of the command line         lt Ctrl b gt or  Left arrow key    Moves the cursor back one position to the left         lt Ctrl f gt or  Right arrow key    Moves the cursor forward one position to the right         lt Backspace gt  or Delete    Erases one character to the left of the cursor position                       key    lt Ctrl d gt  Deletes one character at the cursor position     lt Ctrl k gt  Erases all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line    lt Ctrl l gt  Redisplays the current line     lt Ctrl u gt  Clears the entire line    Other keys Inserts new characters at the cursor position        Prints the current level menu list        Moves to the previous directory level     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     14    Command line interface shortcuts    The following shortcuts allow you to enter commands quickly and ea
28.  as a result of receiving an EAPOL   Logoff message        auth        EntersAuthenticating    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING  as a result of an EAPResponse   Identity message being received from the Supplicant        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  57    Table 46 802 1x statistics for port       Statistics Description   authSuccessesWhile Total number of times that the state machine transitions from   Authenticating AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED  as a result of the Backend  Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the  Supplicant    authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from    AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING  as a result of the Backend  Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout        aut    hFailWhileAuthenticating    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATING to HELD  as a result of the Backend Authentication  state machine indicating authentication failure        aut    hReauthsWhileAuthenticating    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING  as a result of a re authentication  request       aut    hEapStartsWhileAuthenticating    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING  as a result of an EAPOL Start  message being received from the Supplicant        a
29.  cur   Display current FDB configuration       The following table describes the Forwarding Database Configuration Menu options     Table 114 FDB Configuration Menu options          Command Description   static Displays the Static FDB Configuration Menu    aging  lt 0 65535 gt  Configures the aging value for FDB entries  The default value is 300   cur Displays current FDB parameters     Static FDB configuration    Command   cfg 12 fdb static     Static FDB Menu   add   Add a permanent FDB entry    del   Delete a static FDB entry  clear   Clear static FDB entries  cur   Display current static FDB configuration       The following table describes the Static FDB Configuration Menu options     Table 115 Static FDB Configuration Menu options          Command Description  add  lt MAC address gt   lt VLAN gt   lt port gt  Adds a static entry to the forwarding database   del  lt MAC address gt   lt VLAN gt   lt port gt  Deletes a static entry from the forwarding database   clear mac  lt MAC Address gt  VLAN  lt 1 4095 gt   Clears specified static FDB entries from the forwarding  Port  lt port number gt  A11 database   as follows    e MAC address   e VLAN   e Port   e All       cur    Displays current static FDB parameters     Trunk configuration    Command   cfg 12 trunk  lt 1 12 gt      Trunk group 1 Menu   add Add port to trunk group  rem Remove port from trunk group    ena Enable trunk group  dis Disable trunk group  del Delete trunk group  cur Display current Trunk Group configur
30.  current ACL Update User Priority parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  144    ACL Re mark Out of Profile configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  re mark outprof     Re marking   Out Of Profile Menu   updscp   Set the update DSCP    reset   Reset out of profile settings       cur   Display current settings    Table 169 ACL Re mark Out of Profile Configuration Menu options  Command Description    updscp  lt 0 63 gt  Sets the DiffServ Code Point  DSCP  of Out of Profile packets to the selected  value  The switch sets the DSCP value on Out of Profile packets           reset Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out of Profile packets to their default  values   cur Displays the current ACL re mark out profile parameters     ACL Packet Format configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  pktfmt     Filtering Packet Format Menu   ethfmt   Set to filter on ethernet format  tag  mt   Set to filter on ethernet tagging format    reset   Reset all fields  cur   Display current parameters       The following table describes the Packet Format Configuration Menu options     Table 170 Packet Format Configuration Menu options  Command Description  ethfmt eth2 snaplllc Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL              tagfmt none tagged Defines the tagging format for the ACL  The default is none   reset Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values   cur Displays the current Packet Format paramet
31.  downlink ports  1 16   and turned On for cross connect  ports  17 18   and uplink ports  20 24   By default for RSTP MSTP  Spanning tree is turned Off for all downlink  ports  1 16  configured as Edge ports  and turned On for cross connect ports  17 18  and all uplink ports  20 24      Spanning tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis  STP port parameters  include      Port priority     Port path cost   The following table describes the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu options     Table 113 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu options  Command  prior  lt 0 255 gt     Description   Configures the port priority  The port priority helps determine which bridge port   becomes the designated port    In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single   segment  the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the   segment    The range is O to 255  and the default is 128    RSTP MSTP  The range is 0 to 240  in steps of 16  0  16  32     and the default is   128    Configures the port path cost  The port path cost is used to help determine the   designated port for a segment  Generally speaking  the faster the port  the lower   the path cost    The range is O to 65535  The default is 4 for Gigabit ports except Port 19  A value   of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link   speed  The default cost is 19 for 100Mb s ports and 4 for Gigabit ports    RSTP M
32.  enabled  the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent  with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs     The following table describes the NTP statistics     Table 76 NTP statistics    Statistics Description   Primary Server Requests Sent  The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary  NTP server to synchronize time   Responses Received  The total number of NTP responses received from the  primary NTP server   Updates  The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP  responses received from the primary NTP server    Secondary Server Requests Sent  The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the  secondary NTP server to synchronize time   Responses Received  The total number of NTP responses received from the  secondary NTP server   Updates  The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP  responses received from the secondary NTP server                       Last update based on Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP  response from primary response received    server   Last update time The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated   Current system time The switch system time when the command  stats ntp was issued     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  81    Uplink Failure Detection statistics    This menu option allows you to display Uplink Failure Detection  UFD  statistics  T
33.  following table describes the VRRP statistics   Table 67 VRRP statistics                            Field Description   vrrpInAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received   vrrpOutAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent   vrrpBadVersion The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad version number   vrrpBadAddress The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad address   vrrpBadPassword The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad password   vrrpBadAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped   vrrpBadVrid The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad virtual router ID   vrrpBadData The total number of VRRP advertisements that had bad data   vrrpBadInterval The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad interval     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L8 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  75    RIP statistics    Command   stats 13 rip    RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION   RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE       RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE  RIE          packets received   12  packets sent   75   request received   0   response received   12  request sent   3   response sent   72   route timeout   0   bad size packet received   0  bad version received   0   bad zeros received   0   bad src port received   0  bad src IP received   0  packets from self received   0                         The following table describes the basic Routing Information Protocol  RIP  statistics   
34.  for an ACL  The following table describes the TCP UDP  Filter Configuration Menu options     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  142    Table 164 TCP UDP Filter Configuration Menu options   Command Description   sport  lt 1 65535 gt   lt port mask gt  Defines a source port for the ACL  If defined  traffic with the specified TCP  or UDP source port will match this ACL  Specify the port number  Listed  below are some of the well known ports   Number Name       20 ftp data   21 ftp   22 ssh   23 telnet   25 smtp   37 time   42 name   43 whois   53 domain   69 tftp   70 gopher   79 finger   80 http  dport  lt 1 65535 gt   lt port mask gt  Defines a destination port for the ACL  If defined  traffic with the specified    TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL  Specify the port number   justas with sport above              flags  lt value  0x0 0x3f  gt  Defines a TCP UDP flag for the ACL     lt mask gt    reset Resets the TCP UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values   cur Displays the current TCP UDP Filtering parameters     ACL Meter configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  meter     Metering Menu   cir   Set committed rate in KiloBits s    mbsize   Set maximum burst size in KiloBits    enable   Enable disable port metering    dpass Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic    reset Reset meter parameters       cur Display current settings       This menu defines the metering profile for the selected ACL     Table 
35.  for no limit  The default  value is 0        default  lt 1 16777214 gt    lt 1 2 gt  none    Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area   Enter none for no default route              on Enables OSPF   off Disables OSPF  This is the default   cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings     OSPF Area Index configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf aindex  lt 0 2 gt      OSPF Area  index  1    Menu     areaid   Set area ID   type Set area type   metric Set stub area metric  auth Set authentication type    spf Set tim    interval between two SPF calculations       enable Enable area  disable Disable area    delet Delet          area    cur Display current OSPF area configuration       The following table describes the Area Index Configuration Menu options     Table 136 OSPF Area Index Configuration Menu options       Command  areaid  lt IP address gt     Description  Defines the area ID of the OSPF area number        type transit stub nssa    Defines the type of area  For example  when a virtual link has to be   established with the backbone  the area type must be defined as transit    e Transit area  allows area summary information to be exchanged between  routing devices  Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to  be transit area    e Stub area  is an area where external routing information is not  distributed  Typically  a stub area is connected to only one other area    e NSSA  Not So Stubby Area  NSSA  is similar to stub area with additio
36.  formatted with line breaks but no carriage returns  The file cannot be viewed with  editors that require carriage returns  such as Microsoft Notepad      NOTE  If the FTP TFTP server is running SunOS    or the Solaris    operating system  the specified ptcfg file  must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable  set with proper permission  and not  locked by any application   The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration  data     Restoring the active switch configuration    Command   cfg gtcfg  lt FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename gt     When the gtcfg command is used  the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the  specified configuration file  The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial configuration  The  configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used  If the apply command is found in  the configuration script file loaded using this command  the apply action will be performed automatically     To start the switch configuration download  at the Configuration  prompt  enter     Configuration  gtcfg  lt FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename gt     Where  lt FTP TFTP servers is the FTP TFTP server IP address or hostname and  lt filename gt  is the name of the  target script configuration file     Enter the user name  if you are using a FTP server     Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server   lt userID gt        N8406 023 1Gb I
37.  global statistics   aindex  lt 0 2 gt  Displays area index statistics   if  lt 1 255 gt  Displays interface statistics        OSPF global statistics    Command   stats 13 ospf general  OSPF stats  Rx Tx Stats     Pkts   hello  database   ls requests  ls acks   ls updates    Nbr change stats  Intf change Stats   hello up 4  start down 2  n2way loop 0  adjoint ok unloop 0  negotiation done wait timer 2  exchange done backup 0  bad requests nbr change 5  bad sequence  loading done  nlway  rst_ad  down   Timers kickoff  hello  retransmit  lsa lock  lsa ack  dbage  summary  ase export    HOON GOOR G N N CN    a  pb  Hs    o       The following table describes the OSPF global statistics   Table 66 OSPF global statistics       Statistic Description    Rx Tx stats              Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces   Tx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces   Rx Hello The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  72    Table 66 OSPF global statistics       Statistic    Tx Hello    Description    The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces        Rx Database    The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and  interfaces        Tx Database    The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas  and
38.  icmpInTimeExcds   icmpInParmProbs  icmpInSrcQuenchs   icmpInRedirects  icmpInEchos   icmpInEchoReps  icmpInTimestamps   icmpInTimestampReps  icmpInAddrMasks   icmpInAddrMaskReps  icmpOutMsgs   icmpOutErrors  icmpOutDestUnreachs        o                icmpOutTimeExcds     icmpOutSrcQuenchs        icmpOutEchos        icmpOutTimestamps   icmpOutAddrMasks        icmpOutParmProbs   icmpOutRedirects   icmpOutEchoReps   icmpOutTimestampReps   icmpOutAddrMaskReps              O0o0o0O0Oo00sysOoOoOoOoOoOo       0  0  0  0  0  0  0  J  0  0    The following table describes the Internet Control Messaging Protocol  ICMP  statistics     Table 61 ICMP statistics    Statistics  icmpInMsgs    Description  The total number of ICMP messages which the switch received  Note that this  counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors        icmpInErrors    The number of ICMP messages which the switch received but determined as  having ICMP specific errors  for example bad ICMP checksums and bad  length         icmpInDestUnreachs    The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received        icmpInTimeExcds    The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received           icmpInParmProbs    The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received        icmpInSrcQuenchs    The number of ICMP Source Quench  buffer almost full  stop sending data   messages received        icmpInRedirects    The number of ICMP Redirect messages received        icmpInEchos    The number of ICMP Echo  request  m
39.  interfaces        Rx ls Requests    The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF  areas and interfaces        Tx ls Requests    The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  interfaces        Rx ls Acks    The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF  areas and interfaces        Tx ls Acks    The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF  areas and interfaces        Rx ls Updates    The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and  interfaces           Tx ls Updates    The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  interfaces        Nbr change stats              hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and  interfaces    Start The sum total number of neighbors in this state  that is  an indication that Hello  packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval  seconds  across all OSPF areas and interfaces    n2way The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this    router and other neighboring routers        adjoint ok    The sum total number of decisions to be made  again  as to whether an adjacency  should be established maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and  interfaces        negotiation done    The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master slave  relatio
40.  is turned on by default     NOTE  When RSTP is turned on  only STP group 1 can be configured     The following table describes the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options     Table 111 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options                            Command Description   brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu    port  lt port number gt  Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu    add  lt 1 4094 gt  Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a  parameter    remove  lt 1 4094 gt  Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an  external VLAN ID as a parameter    clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree    on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol    off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol    default Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration    cur Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  110    Bridge Spanning Tree configuration    Command   cfg 12 stp  lt STG number gt  brg     Bridge Spanning Tree Menu   prior   Set bridge Priority  0 65535   hello Set bridge Hello Time  1 10 secs     mxage Set bridge Max Age  6 40 secs   fwd Set bridge Forward Delay  4 30 secs   cur Display current bridge parameters       Spanning tree bridge parameters can be configured for each Spanning Tree Group  STP bridge parameters  include       Bridge priority     Bridge hello time     Bridge maximum age     Forwarding delay    
41.  location can have a maximum of 64  characters    cont  lt 1 64 characters gt  Configures the name of the system contact  The contact can have a maximum of 64  characters    rcomm  lt 1 32 Configures the SNMP read community string  The read community string controls   characters gt  SNMP    get    access to the switch  It can have a maximum of 32 characters  The  default read community string is public    wcomm  lt 1 32 Configures the SNMP write community string  The write community string controls   characters gt  SNMP    set    and    get    access to the switch  It can have a maximum of 32 characters   The default write community string is private    timeout  lt 1 30 gt  Sets the timeout value for the SNMP state machine  The range is 1 30 minutes  The  default value is 5 minutes    auth disable enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility  The default  setting is disabled    linkt  lt port gt  Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps  The default   disable enable setting is enabled    ufd disable enable Enables or disables the sending of Uplink Failure Detection traps  The default setting  is disabled    cur Displays the current SNMP configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  92    SNMPv3 configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3     SNMPv3 Menu   usm  view  access  group    comm  taddr  tparam  notify  vlv2    cur    usmUser Table Menu  vacmViewTreeFamily Table Menu 
42.  lt 0 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP   Request  Identity frame to the supplicant  client  after an authentication failure  in the previous round of authentication  The default value is 60 seconds        txperiod  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for an EAP   Response ldentity frame from the supplicant  client  before retransmitting an  EAP Request Identity frame  The default value is 30 seconds        suptmout  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for an EAP Response  packet from the supplicant  client  before retransmitting the EAP Request  packet to the authentication server  The default value is 30 seconds        svrtmout  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for a response from the  RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout  The default value    is 30 seconds     The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access Request  packet containing the supplicant s  client s  EAP Response packet is  determined by the current setting of  cfg sys radius timeout   default is 3 seconds         maxreq  lt 1 10 gt     Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP   Request packet to the supplicant  client   The default value is 2        raperiod  lt 1 604800 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits before re authenticating a  supplicant  client  when periodic re au
43.  lt 1 7 gt     This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host  displayed  The range is 0 7  The default is 0        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  86    Table 80 Syslog Configuration Menu options    Command Description   console disable enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the  console  When necessary  disabling console ensures the  switch is not affected by syslog messages  It is enabled by  default    log  lt feature all gt   lt enable disable gt  Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can  be generated  You can choose to enable disable specific  features or enable disable syslog on all available features   Features include    console   system   mgmt   cli   stg   vlan   ssh   vrrp   ntp   ip   web   ospf   rmon   ufd   802 1x   cfg   cur Displays the current syslog settings           Secure Shell Server configuration    Command   cfg sys sshd     SSHD Menu   interval  Set Interval for generating the RSA server key  scpadm Set SCP only admin password  hkeygen Generate the RSA host key  skeygen Generate the RSA server key                sshport Set SSH server port number   ena Enable the SCP apply and save   dis Disable the SCP apply and save   on Turn SSH server ON   off Turn SSH server OFF   cur Display current SSH server configuration             Telnet traffic on the network is not secure  This menu enables Secure Shell  SSH  access from any SSH client  The  SSH program securely logs int
44.  one  of the following    initialize   disconnected   connecting   authenticating   authenticated   aborting   held   forceAuth       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  32    Table 21 802 1x information    Field    Backend Auth State       Spanning Tree information    Command   info 12 stp    Spanning Tree Group 1  On  VLANs  1    Current Root   8000 00 02 a5 d1 0f ed    Description    Displays the Backend Authorization State  The Backend Authorization state can  be one of the following     initialize  request  response  success  fail  timeout  idle     STP PVST      Path Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel    8 20 2 20 15    Parameters  Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging    32768    2    20 15 300    Port Priority Cost FastFwd Designated Bridge Des Port    FORWARDING    FORWARDING    FORWARDING         The switch software uses the IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol  STP   If RSTP MSTP is turned on  see the       Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree information    section for Spanning Tree Group information  In    addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled  you can view the following STP bridge information       Status of Uplink Fast  upfast     Current root MAC address     Path Cost      Port     Hello interval     Maximum age value     Forwarding delay     Aging time    You can also refer to the following port specific STP information       Port number and priority     Cost     State     Port Fast Forwarding state    Designated bridg
45.  only from an administrator  login    ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server  This command is available    only from an administrator login        Operations level port options    Command   oper port  lt port number gt      Operations Port 1 Menu   8021x   8021 x Menu  rmon Enable Disable RMON for port    ena Enable port  dis Disable port  cur Current port state          Operations level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port     Table 183 Operations Level Port Menu options          Command Description   8021x Displays the 802 1x Port Menu  This menu is available only from an administrator login    rmon disable enable Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port  RMON must be enabled for any  RMON configurations to function    ena Temporarily enables the port  The port will be returned to its configured operation mode    when the switch is reset   NOTE  This command does not enable a port that has been disabled by an ekeying mismatch error              dis Temporarily disables the port  The port will be returned to its configured operation mode  when the switch is reset   cur Displays the current settings for the port     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  153    Operations level port 802 1x options    Command   oper port  lt port number gt  8021x     802 1x Operation Menu     reset  reauth         Reinitialize 802 1x access control on this port    Initiate reauthentication on this port now   
46.  so that multiple VLANs are  handled by multiple spanning tree instances  as specified by IEEE 802 1s standard based MSTP  implementation    e IEEE 802 1s MSTP supports rapid convergence using IEEE 802 1w RSTP    e _PVST  does not support rapid convergence in current versions     NOTE   The following configurations are unsupported     e PVST   default Spanning Tree setting  is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST    e MSTP RSTP  with mode set to either    mstp    or    rstp     is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST      The following configurations are supported     e PVST   default Spanning Tree setting  is interoperable with Cisco PVST    MSTP RSTP  with mode set to    mstp     is interoperable with Cisco MST RSTP     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  107    Common Internal Spanning Tree configuration    Command   cfg 12 mrst cist     Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu   brg    port    add  default  cur       CIST Bridge parameter menu   CIST Port parameter menu   Add VLAN s  to CIST   Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters  Display current CIST parameters          The Common Internal Spanning Tree  CIST  provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices  running different Spanning Tree instances  It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0     The following table describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration    Menu options     Table 108 Common Internal Spann
47.  state id  A B C D gt   lt self gt     Displays ASBR summary LSAs  The usage of this command  is as follows     a  asbrsum adv rtr 20 1 1 1 displays ASBR summary  LSAs having the advertising router 20 1 1 1   b  asbrsum link_state_id 10 1 1 1 displays ASBR    summary LSAs having the link state ID 10 1 1 1   c  asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR  summary LSAs   asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR  summary LSAs        dbsumm    Displays the following information about the LS database in  a table format    a  The number of LSAs of each type in each area    b  The total number of LSAs for each area    c  The total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all  areas combined   The total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all  areas combined   No parameters are required     d        ext  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     A B C D  gt   lt self gt      lt link state id    Displays the AS external  type 5  LSAs with detailed  information of each field of the LSAs  The usage of this  command is the same as the usage of the command  asbrsum        nw  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     A B C D  gt   lt self gt      lt link state id    Displays the network  type 2  LSAs with detailed information  of each field of the LSA network LS database  The usage of  this command is the same as the usage of the command  asbrsum        nssa  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     A B C D  gt   lt self gt      lt link state id    Displays the NSSA  type 7  LSAs with detailed information of  each field 
48.  status of each virtual router using this command  VRRP  information includes    e Virtual router number   e Virtual router ID and IP address   e Interface number     Ownership status    e owner identifies the preferred master virtual router  A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of  the virtual router and its IP interface are the same     e renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device    Priority value  During the election process  the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master     Activity status   e master identifies the elected master virtual router    e backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode     e init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event  Once it receives a startup event  it  transitions to master if its priority is 255   the IP address owner   or transitions to backup if it is not the IP  address owner      Server status  The server state identifies virtual routers      Proxy status  The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers  where the virtual router shares the same IP  address as a proxy IP address  The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the  same IP address  minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  48    QoS information  Command   info qos     QoS Menu   8021p   Show QOS 802 1p information    The following table describes the commands us
49.  this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable  The identified    entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this  transport address        SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 tparam       MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level    viv2param snmpv2c viv2only       The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information     Table 15 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table             Field Description   Name Displays the locally arbitrary  but unique identifier associated with this  snmpTargeParamsEntry    MP Model Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using  this entry    User Name Displays the securityName  which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages  will be generated using this entry    Sec Model Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry  The    system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this  variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support   Sec Level Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry        SNMPv3 Notify Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 notify    viv2trap viv2trap       The following table describes the SNMPv3 Notify Table information   Table 16 SNMPv3 Notify Table       Field Description  Name The locally arbitrary  but unique identifier associated with this 
50.  uplink fast mode Displays the status of STP Uplink Fast  enabled or  disabled        Layer 3 information    Command   info 13     Layer 3 Menu   route IP Routing Information Menu  arp ARP Information Menu  ospf OSPF Routing Information Menu    rip RIP Routing Information Menu  ip Show IP information   igmp Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information   vrrp Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information  dump Dump all layer 3 information       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  39    The following table describes the Layer 3 Information Menu options     Table 26 Layer 3 information menu options    Command  route    Usage   Displays the IP Routing Menu  Using the options of this menu  the system displays the   following for each configured or learned route    e Route destination IP address  subnet mask  and gateway address   e Type of route   e Tag indicating origin of route   e Metric for RIP tagged routes  specifying the number of hops to the destination  1 15 hops   or 16 for infinite hops    e The IP interface that the route uses       arp    Displays the Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  Information Menu        Displays OSPF routing Information Menu        ospf  rip    Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu        ip    Displays IP Information  IP information  includes    e  P interface information  Interface number  IP address  subnet mask  VLAN number  and  operational status    e Default gateway information  Metric for selecti
51.  vacmAccess Table Menu  vacmSecurityToGroup Table Menu  community Table Menu   targetAddr Table Menu   targetParams Table Menu   notify Table Menu   Enable disable V1 V2 access   Display current SNMPv3 configuration                SNMP version 3  SNMPv3  is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by  supporting the following     a new SNMP message format    security for messages    access control    remote configuration of SNMP parameters  For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please see RFC2271 to RFC2275     The following table describes the SNMPv3 Configuration Menu options     Table 86 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu options    Command  usm  lt 1 16 gt     Description  Configures a user security model  USM  entry for an authorized user  You can also  configure this entry through SNMP  The range is 1 16        view  lt 1 128 gt     Configures different MIB views  The range is 1 128        access  lt 1 32 gt     Configures access rights  The View based Access Control Model defines a set of  services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user  You need  access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an  SNMP entity  The range is 1 32        group  lt 1 16 gt     Configures an SNMP group  A group maps the user name to the access group names  and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects  A group  defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular grou
52.  you for information  Enter the desired image        Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded         imagel   image2   boot     lt image gt     3  Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server        Enter hostname or IP address of FTP TFTP server   lt server name or IP  address gt        4  Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server        Enter name of file on FTP TFTP server   lt filename gt     5  Enter the user name  if you are using a FTP server        Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server   lt userID gt     6  Enter the password for the FTP server  if prompted         Enter password for username on FTP server   lt password gt     7   The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered  To have the file uploaded  enter y   image2 currently contains Software Version 1 0 0  Upload will transfer image2  1889411 bytes  to file  test   on TFTP server 192 1 1 1     Confirm upload operation  y n   y       Selecting a configuration block    When you make configuration changes to the switch  you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond  the next time the switch is reset  When you execute the save command  your new configuration changes are placed  in the active configuration block  The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block     There is also a factory configuration block  This holds the default configuration set by the factory when 
53. 0 oee G a G OOO aes A am DA aae 010          ONO 0 2 0   0 00 0 0 10 00 e E ae O ea A a E OOO OS    yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes   no   no          N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes  yes   no   no       52    Use this command to display link status information about each port on a switch  including   e     Port number     Phy Type  GE or SFP      Port speed  10 Mb s  100 Mb s  1000 Mb s  or any      Duplex mode  half  full  or any      Flow control for transmit and receive  no  yes  or any      Link status  up or down     Port information    Command   info port    Port Tag Media RMON PVID                   L Xconnectl  L Xconnect2  gmt   1 Uplinkl   1 Uplink2   1 Uplink3   1 Uplink4   L Uplink5          2000200000000 00000000000o0po0ao          DBpppAnpR AAA AAARBPARSAASARpAAA SA Ss          Port information includes       Port number     Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or nat  y or n      Media type  Auto  Copper  or Fiber      Whether Remote Monitoring  RMON  is enabled or disabled  e or d     Port VLAN ID  PVID      Port name     VLAN membership    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  53    Logical Port to GEA Port mapping    Command   info geaport       Logical Port EA Port  0 based  EA Unit             Oo0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O
54. 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  149    Link to Monitor configuration    Command   cfg ufd fdp  lt FDP number gt  1tm     Failure Link to Monitor Menu     addport    remport    addtrnk    remtrnk  addkey    Add port to Link    to Monitor    Remove port from Link to Monitor    Add trunk to Lin    k to Monitor    Remove trunk from Link to Monitor    Add adminkey to       remkey    cur    Link to Monitor    Remove adminkey from Link to Monitor    Display current          LtM configuration    The following table describes the Link to Monitor  LtM  Menu options  The LtM can consist of only one uplink port   ports 20 24   a single trunk containing only uplink ports  or a single LACP trunk group containing only uplink ports     Table 180 Link to Monitor Menu options    Command  addport  lt port number gt     Description    Adds a port to the LtM  Only uplink ports  20 24  are allowed in the LtM        remport  lt port number gt     Removes a port from the LtM        addtrnk  lt 1 12 gt     Adds a trunk group to the LtM  The LtM trunk group can contain only uplink ports     20 24         remtrnk  lt 1 12 gt     Removes a trunk group from the LtM        addkey  lt LACP port    Adds a LACP trunk group to the LtM  The LtM LACP trunk group can contain only          adminkey gt  uplink ports  20 24     remkey  lt LACP port Removes a LACP trunk group from the LtM   adminkey gt    cur Displays the current LtM configuration     Link to Disable configuration    Comm
55. 0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0Oo0Oo0Oo0ooOo       This display correlates the logical port number to the GEA unit on which each port resides     SFP information    Command   info stp       Device Enable RX Signal TX Fault         NOT Installed                 NOT Installed       FI SFP enabled ok none  FI SFP enabled ok none       This display the status of SFP module     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  54    Uplink Failure Detection information    Command   info ufd       Uplink Failure Detection 1  Enabled    LtM status  Down  Member STG STG State       10 DISABLE  15 DISABL  STP turned off for this port                 LtD status  Auto Disabled  Member Link Status    disabled  disabled  disabled  disabled    Uplink Failure Detection 2  Disabled    Uplink Failure Detection 3  Disabled    Uplink Failure Detection 4  Disabled    Uplink Failure Detection  UFD  information includes       UFD status  either enabled or disabled    LtM status and member ports     Spanning Tree status for LtM ports     LtD status and member ports    Information dump    Command   info dump    Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu  10K or more   depending on your configuration   This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance     If you want to capture dump data to a file  set the communication software on your workstation to capture session    data prior to issuing the dump commands     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L
56. 165 ACL Meter Configuration Menu options       Command Description   cir  lt 64 1000000 gt  Configures the committed rate  in Kilobits per second  The committed rate  must be a multiple of 64  The default value is 64    mbsize  lt 32 4096 gt  Configures the maximum burst size  in Kilobits  Enter one of the following    values for mbsize  32  64  128  256  512  1024  2048  4096  The default value is 32                 enable eld Enables or disables metering on the ACL  The default is disabled   dpass drop pass Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out of profile traffic   reset Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values    cur Displays the current ACL metering parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L8 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  143    ACL Re mark configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  re mark     Re mark Menu     inprof In Profile Menu    outprof Out Profile Menu    reset Reset re mark settings       cur Display current settings    You can choose to re mark IP header data for the selected ACL  You can configure different remark values  based  on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile  or out of the ACL Metering profile     Table 166 ACL Re mark Configuration Menu options             Command Description   inprof Displays the Re mark In Profile Menu    outprof Displays the Re mark Out of Profile Menu    reset Reset ACL Re mark parameters to their default values   cur    Displays the current ACL re mark parameters 
57. 2 route maps  enter a11   To remove specific route maps  enter routing map numbers one per line  NULL at  end    export  lt 1 16777214 gt  Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS external LSAs in which the    lt 1 2 gt  none metric and metric type are specified  To remove a previous configuration and stop  exporting the routes of the protocol  enter none    cur Displays the current route map settings     OSPF MD5 Key configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf md5key  lt key ID gt      OSPF MD5 Key Menu   key Set authentication key    delet Delete key  cur Display current MD5 key configuration          The following table describes the OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu options   Table 142 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu options             Command Description   key Sets the authentication key  up to 16 characters  for this OSPF packet   delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet    cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  129    IGMP configuration    Command   cfg 13 igmp     IGMP Menu   snoop  mrouter    igmpflt  on   off   cur    IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it  IGMP Snooping  prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports  The switch learns which server hosts are interested in    IGMP Snoop Menu   Static Multicast Router Menu   IGMP Filtering Menu   Globally turn IGMP ON   Globally turn IGMP OFF   
58. 3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     Link Status       55       Statistics Menu    Introduction    You can view switch performance statistics in the user  operator  and administrator command modes  This chapter  discusses how to use the CLI to display switch statistics     Menu information  Command   stats     Statistics Menu    The following table describes t    Table 44 Statistics Menu opti        Port Stats Menu   Layer 2 Stats Menu  Layer 3 Stats Menu  MP specific Stats Menu       ACL Stats Menu   Show SNMP stats   Show NTP stats   Show Uplink Failure Detection stats  Clear all MP related stats   Dump all stats       he Statistics Menu options     ons    Command  port  lt port number gt     Usage   Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port  Use this command to display  traffic statistics on a port by port basis  Traffic statistics are included in SNMP  Management Information Base  MIB  objects                    12 Displays the Layer 2 Statistics Menu    13 Displays the Layer 3 Statistics Menu    mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu  Use this command to view  information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being  allocated    acl Displays the Access Control List Statistics Menu    snmp Displays SNMP statistics        ntp  lt clear gt     Displays Network Time Protocol  NTP  Statistics   Add the argument  clear  to clear NTP statistics        ufd  lt clear gt     Displays Uplink Failure Detection statistics   A
59. 7 Menu   filt   Enable disable IGMP Filtering on port  add   Add IGMP filter to port    rem   Remove IGMP filter from port  cur   Display current IGMP Filtering Port configuration          The following table describes the IGMP Port Filtering Configuration Menu options   Table 148 IGMP Filtering Port Menu             Command Description   filt enable disable Enables or disables IGMP Filtering on this port  The default is disabled   add  lt 1 16 gt  Adds an IGMP filter to this port    rem  lt 1 16 gt  Removes an IGMP filter from this port    cur Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port     Domain Name System configuration    Command   cfg 13 dns     Domain Name System Menu   prima   Set primary DNS server address    secon   Set secondary DNS server address  dname   Set default domain name  cur   Display current DNS configuration       The Domain Name System  DNS  Configuration Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers  on your local network  and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services  DNS parameters  must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping  traceroute  and tftp commands     The following table describes the Domain Name System  DNS  Configuration Menu options     Table 149 Domain Name System  DNS  Configuration Menu options       Command Description   prima  lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address for your primary DNS server  Use  dotted decimal notation  For example  192 4 17 41   secon
60. 79 System Configuration Menu options    Command  dlight disable enable    Usage   Disables or enables daylight saving time in the system clock  When  enabled  the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so  that it is consistent with the local clock  By default  this option is  disabled        idle  lt 1 60 gt     Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions  from 1 to 60 minutes  The  default is 5 minutes   This setting affects both the console port and Telnet port        notice  lt 1 1024 character multi   line gt   lt     to end gt     Displays login notice immediately before the    Enter password      prompt  This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new  lines        bannr  lt 1 80 characters gt     Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters  When a user or  administrator logs into the switch  the login banner is displayed  It is  also displayed as part of the output from the  info sys gen  command        hprompt disable enable    Enables or disables displaying of the host name  system  administrator s name  in the command line interface        bootp disablelenable    Enables or disables the use of BOOTP  If you enable BOOTP  the  switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP  parameters  The default value is enabled        dhcp disablelenable    Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the  management IP address on interface 256  When enabled  the IP  address obtained from the DHCP server overrides the static IP  addr
61. Abstract Syntax Notation One  defined in X 208   and one set of rules  for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER  Basic  Encoding Rules  defined in X 209     ASN 1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types  from  simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and  sequences    BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN 1 type as a string of  eight bit octets                    snmpEnableAuthTraps An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this switch    snmpOutPkts The total number of SNMP messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol  entity to the transport service    snmpInBadTypes The total number of SNMP messages which failed ASN 1 parsing    snmpInTooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs  that were delivered to the    SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is too big        snmpInNoSuchNames    The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs  that were delivered to the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is noSuchName        snmpInBadValues    The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs  that were delivered to the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is badValue        snmpInReadOnlys    The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were delivered to  the SNMP protocol entity and 
62. Access configuration    Command   cfg sys access https     https Menu   access Enable Disable HTTPS Web access  port HTTPS WebServer port number       generat Generate self signed HTTPS server certificate  certSav save HTTPS certificate  cur Display current SSL Web Access configuration             The following table describes the HTTPS Access Configuration menu options     Table 99 HTTPS Access Configuration menu options          Command Description   access enable disable Enables or disables BBI access  Web access  using HTTPS  The default value is  disabled   port  lt TCP port number gt  Defines the HTTPS Web server port number  The default is 443    generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key    exchange  A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time   The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be  used in the various fields  For example    Country Name  2 letter code       JP   State or Province Name  full name       Tokyo   Locality Name  for example  city       Fuchu   Organization Name  for example  company       NEC   Organizational Unit Name  for example  section       SIGMABLADE  Common Name  for example  user s name       Taro   Email  for example  email address       info nec com   You must confirm if you want to generate the certificate  lt takes approximately  30 seconds to generate the certificate  Then the switch restarts SSL agent           cer
63. Aggregation Control Protocol Menu    vlan  lt 1 4095 gt  Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu    upfast Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence  which provides rapid Spanning Tree    enable disable    convergence to an upstream switch during failover   Note  When enabled  this feature increases bridge priorities to 65500 for all STGs  except STG 128 and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports        update  lt 10 200 gt     Configures the station update rate  in packets per second   The range is 10 200  The default value is 40        cur    802 1x configuration    Displays current Layer 2 parameters     Command   cfg 12 8021x     802 1x Configuration Menu   global   Global 802 1x configuration menu  port    ena  dis  cur    Port 802 1x configuration menu  Enable 802 1x access control  Disable 802 1x access control  Show 802 1x configuration          This feature allows you to configure the switch as an IEEE 802 1x Authenticator  to provide port based network  access control  The following table describes the 802 1x Configuration Menu options     Table 104 802 1x Configuration Menu options    Command    global    Description    Displays the global 802 1x Configuration Menu        port  lt port number gt     Displays the 802 1x Port Menu              ena Globally enables 802  1x   dis Globally disables 802 1x  This is the default   cur Displays current 802 1x parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  104    802 1x Global configura
64. C SHA 96   If you select none  as the authentication protocol  you will get an error message              privpw Configures the privacy password   del Deletes the USM user entries   cur Displays the USM user entries     SNMPv3 View configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 view  lt view number gt      SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu     name   Set view name    tree  mask  type    Set MIB subtree  OID   Set view mask  Set view type    which defines a family of view subtrees    del Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry  cur Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration       The following table describes the SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options     Table 88 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options    Command  name  lt 1 32 characters gt     Description  Defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters        tree  lt 1 64 characters gt     Defines the Object Identifier  OID   a string of maximum 64 characters  which  when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees   An example of an OID is 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0       mask  lt 1 32 characters gt     Defines the bit mask  which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a  family of view subtrees  The mask can have a maximum of 32 characters        type included excluded    Selects whether the corresponding instances of  vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask  define a family of view subtrees  which is included in or excluded from the MIB  view      
65. Command Reference Guide  AOS  146    RMON event configuration    Command   cfg rmon event  lt 1 65535 gt        Event 1  descn  type  owner    Menu     set  Set  Set    description for the event    event type    owner for the event       delet    cur    Del    te this event and restore defaults    Display current event configuration       The following table describes the RMON Event Menu options   Table 174 RMON Event Menu options    Command    descn  lt 1 127 characters gt     Description  Enter a text string to describe the event   The description can have a maximum of 127 characters        type none log trap both    Selects the type of notification provided for this event  For log events  an entry is  made in the log table and sent to the configured syslog host  For trap events  an  SNMP trap is sent to the management station        owner  lt 1 127 characters gt     Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this event index   The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters        delete    Deletes this event index        cur    RMON alarm configuration    Displays the current RMON Event parameters     Command   cfg rmon alarm  lt 1 65535 gt      RMON Alarm 1  oid  intrval  sample  almtype  rlimit  flimit  revtidx  fevtidx  owner  delet    Menu     Set  Set  Set  Set  Set  Set  Set  Set  Set  Del    MIB oid datasource to monitor   alarm interval   sample type   startup alarm type   rising threshold   falling threshold   event index to fire on rising 
66. Command Usage   pkt Displays packet statistics  to check for leads and load    tcb Displays all Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  control blocks  TCB  that are in use   ucb Displays all User Datagram Protocol  UDP  control blocks  UCB  that are in use    cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1  4  and 64 seconds     Packet statistics    Command   stats mp pkt    Packet counts     allocs     mediums     jumbos     smalls     failures     frees   mediums hi watermark   jumbos hi watermark     smalls hi watermark        The following table describes the packet statistics     Table 70 MP specific packet statistics          Description Example statistic   allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack    frees Total number of times the packet buffers are freed  released  to the packet buffer pool by the  TCP IP protocol stack    mediums Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet    buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack        mediums hi watermark    The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet  buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack        jumbos    Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by  the TCP IP protocol stack        jumbos hi watermark    The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer  pool by the TCP IP protocol stack     
67. Display current IGMP configuration       receiving multicast traffic  and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers     The following table describes the IGMP Menu options   Table 143 IGMP Snoop Menu options                   Command Description   snoop Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu    mrouter Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu   igmpflt Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu    on Globally turns IGMP on    off Globally turns IGMP off  This is the default    cur Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters     IGMP snooping configuration    Command   cfg 13 igmp snoop     IGMP Snoop Menu     timeout  mrto  gintrval  robust  aggr    srcip  add  rem  clear  fastlv  cur    Set report timeout   Set multicast router timeout   Set IGMP query interval   Set expected packet loss on subnet  Aggregate IGMP report   Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ   Add VLAN s  to IGMP Snooping   Remove VLAN s  from IGMP Snooping   Remove all VLAN s  from IGMP Snooping  Enable disable Fastleave processing in VLAN  Display current IGMP Snooping configuration                The following table describes the IGMP Snoop Configuration Menu options     Table 144 IGMP Snoop Menu options    Command  timeout  lt 1 255 gt     Description  Sets the Maximum Response Time  MRT  for IGMP hosts  MRT is one of the    parameters used to determine the age out period of the IGMP hosts  Increasing the    timeout increases the age out period   The range is from 1 to 255 seconds  The default is 10 sec
68. Export all routes of this protocol       Display current route maps added    The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribute Menu options     Table 134 RIP Redistribute Configuration Menu options    Command  add  lt 1 32 gt  all    Description   Adds selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list  To add  all the 32 route maps  enter al 1  To add specific route maps  enter  routing map numbers one per line  NULL at the end    This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list  The routes  of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route  redistribution list will be redistributed        remove  lt 1 32 gt  all    Removes the route map from the RIP route redistribution list    Removes routing maps from the list  To remove all 32 route maps  enter  all  To remove specific route maps  enter routing map numbers one  per line  NULL at end        export  lt metric 1 15 gt  none    Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type  are specified  To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting  the routes of the protocol  enter none        cur    Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration     Open Shortest Path First configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf     Open Shortest Pat    aindex    range   if   virt  md5key    host  redist  lsdb  default  on   off   cur    OS  OS  OS  OS  OS  OS  OS    PE  PE  pr  pr  PE  PF  PE       Area    h First Menu      index  Menu    Summary Range Menu  Int
69. MP state machine   auth Enable disable SNMP  sysAuthenTrap    linkt Enable disable SNMP link up down trap   ufd Enable disable SNMP Uplink Failure Detection trap  cur Display current SNMP configuration          The switch software supports SNMP based network management  In SNMP model of network management  a  management station  client manager  accesses a set of variables known as MIBs  Management Information Base   provided by the managed device  agent   If you are running an SNMP network management station on your  network  you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs      MIB II  RFC 1213      Ethernet MIB  RFC 1643      Bridge MIB  RFC 1493    An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages   Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify      SNMP parameters that can be modified include      System name     System location     System contact     Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function     Read community string     Write community string   The following table describes the System SNMP Configuration Menu options     Table 85 System SNMP Configuration Menu options                                  Command Description   snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu    name  lt 1 64 characters gt  Configures the name for the system  The name can have a maximum of 64  characters    locn  lt 1 64 characters gt  Configures the name of the system location  The
70. Model  USM  in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of  messages  This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table  The  USM user table contains information like     the user name    authenticated    the privacy protocol     a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model  an authentication protocol  which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be    The following table describes the SNMPv3 User Table information     Table 9 SNMPv3 User Table parameters       Field Description  User Name This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch   Protocol This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using    a privacy protocol  The switch software supports DES algorithm for privacy  The software also  supports two authentication algorithms  MD5 and HMAC SHA     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  22    SNMPv3 View Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 view  View Name Subtree    included    viv2only included  viv2only adorns O S s excluded  viv2only 63350  1 623  excluded  viv2only   O Oido excluded       The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in  the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group s rig
71. NEC    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch  Command Reference Guide  AOS     Part number  856 126757 204 00  Second edition  Oct 2007    UA ACE A A  PN  456 01770 000    Legal notices     2007 NEC Corporation    The information contained herein is subject to change without notice  The only warranties for NEC products and services are set forth in the  express warranty statements accompanying such products and services  Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional  warranty  NEC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein     Microsoft    Windows    and Windows NTO are U S  registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation    SunOS    and Solaris    are trademarks of Sun Microsystems  Inc  in the U S  and other countries    Cisco   is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems  Inc  and or its affiliates in the U S  and certain other countries   Part number  856 126757 204 00   Second edition  Oct 2007       Contents    Command line interface    TTROCUCTION A OOO OO 8  Additional references  inisip iiiaae ea aa E aE a aaa aa Taa aTi a aae Ea TEn a Taa Tia antai 8  Connecting to the Wilson 8  Establishing a Console  Connection  iai eren ae 8  setting an IP Address iii As 9  Establishing a Telnet CONNECTION          ee eeeeeescceeeececeeeeceenereenersneeeeaeessanerseneseeeessaeeesanessanersneneeaeeseanestenestenerees 9  Establishing am  SSH COMEN  it 9  Accessing Te  SWITCH ia nis eaei aoaaa ra a a da di 10  NTU SOUL  ers ig 
72. P Menu   aggr   Show LACP aggregator information for the port       port   Show LACP port information  dump   Show all LACP ports information       The following table describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu options   Table 20 LACP information          Command Usage   aggr Displays LACP aggregator information for the port    port Displays LACP information for the port    dump Displays all LACP information parameters   LACP dump    Command   info 12 lacp dump     gt  gt  LACP  dump  port lacp adminkey operkey selected j attached trunk       0 ator UU B WBN BP  Orn oO E N  5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5    1  2  3  4  2  6  7  8       LACP dump includes the following information for each port in the switch       lacp   Displays the port s LACP mode  active  passive  or off      adminkey   Displays the value of the port s adminkey      operkey   Shows the value of the port s operational key      selected   Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group     prio   Shows the value of the port priority      attached aggr   Displays the aggregator associated with each port      trunk   This value represents the LACP trunk group number     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  31    802 1x information  Command   info 12 8021x  System capability  System status    Protocol version    Port Auth Mode    m    force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut  force aut
73. P Port Configuration Menu options     Table 120 LACP Port Configuration Menu options       Command    mode off active passive    Description    Set the LACP mode for this port  as follows     e off  Turn LACP off for this port  You can use this port to manually configure a  static trunk  The default value is off   e active  Turn LACP on and set this port to active  Active ports initiate LACPDUs   e passive  Turn LACP on and set this port to passive  Passive ports do not initiate  LACPDUs  but respond to LACPDUs from active ports        prio  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the priority value for the selected port  Lower numbers provide higher  priority  Default is 32768        adminkey  lt 1 65535 gt     Set the admin key for this port  Only ports with the same admin key and oper  key  operational state generated internally  can form a LACP trunk group        cur    Displays the current LACP configuration for this port     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  115    VLAN configuration  Command   cfg 12 vlan  lt 1 4095 gt      VLAN 1 Menu   name Set VLAN name  stg Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group  add Add port to VLAN  rem Remove port from VLAN    def Define VLAN as list of ports   ena Enable VLAN   dis Disable VLAN   del Delete VLAN   cur Display current VLAN configuration             The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes  change the status of the VLAN  delete the VLAN  and  change the port membership of the VLAN     By default  the VLAN 
74. P Routing Menu   find   Show a single route by destination IP address  gw Show routes to a single gateway  type Show routes of a single type    Show routes of a single tag   Show routes on a single interface  Show all routes   Clear route table       The following table describes the IP Route Manipulation Menu options     Table 191 IP Route Manipulation Menu options                      Command Usage   find  lt IP address gt  Shows a single route by destination IP address   gw  lt IP address gt  Shows routes to a default gateway    type Shows routes of a single type    indirect  direct local broadcast martian    multicast   tag fixed static addr rip ospf  Shows routes of a single tag   broadcast martian   if  lt 1 256 gt  Shows routes on a single interface    dump Shows all routes    clear Clears the route table from switch memory     IGMP Multicast Group options    Command   maint igmp     IGMP Multicast Group Menu   snoop   IGMP Snooping Menu    mrouter   IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu  clear   Clear group and mrouter tables       The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu options     Table 192 IGMP Multicast Group Menu options          Command Usage   snoop Displays the IGMP Snooping maintenance menu   mrouter Displays the IGMP Multicast Router maintenance menu   clear Clears IGMP Multicast data from switch memory     IGMP Snooping options  Command   maint igmp snoop     IGMP Multicast Group Menu   find   Show a single group by IP group addres
75. SNMP statistics          Statistics Description   snmpOutGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get Response Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have  been generated by the SNMP protocol entity    snmpOutTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have been  generated by the SNMP protocol entity    snmpSilentDrops The total number of GetRequest PDUs  GetNextRequest PDUs GetBulkRequest     PDUs  SetRequest PDUs  and InformRequest PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity  which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate  Response PDU with an empty variable bindings field was too large    snmpProxyDrops The total number of GetRequest PDUs  GetNextRequest PDUs GetBulkRequest   PDUs  SetRequest PDUs  and InformRequest PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity  which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy  target failed in a manner  other than a time out  such that no Response PDU could be  returned           NTP statistics    Command   stats ntp    NTP statistics   Primary Server   Requests Sent   Responses Received   Updates   Secondary Server        Requests Sent  0   Responses Received  0   Updates  0  Last update based on response from primary server   Last update time  18 04 16 Tue Mar 13  2006  Current system time  18 55 49 Tue Mar 13  2006             The switch uses NTP  Network Timing Protocol  version 3 to synchronize the switch   s internal clock with an atomic  time calibrated NTP server  With NTP
76. STP  The range is 0     200000000  and the default is 20000 for Gigabit   ports except Port 19    Defines the type of link connected to the port  as follows    e auto  Configures the port to detect the link type  and automatically match its  settings    e p2p  Configures the port for Point To Point protocol    e shared  Configures the port to connect to a shared medium  usually a hub     This command only applies when RSTP is turned on  See the    Common Internal   Spanning Tree configuration    section for more information    Enables or disables this port as an edge port  An edge port is not connected to a   bridge  and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up  Configure server   ports as edge ports  enabled   By default  Ports 1 16 are configured as edge   ports    This command only applies when RSTP is turned on  See the    Common Internal   Spanning Tree configuration    section for more information        cost  lt 0 200000000 gt        link auto p2p shared       edge disablelenable       fastfwd disable enable    Enables or disables Port Fast Forward on the port  The default is disabled              on Enables STP on the port  This is the default for Ports 17 18 and 20 24   off Disables STP on the port   cur Displays the current STP port parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  112    Forwarding Database configuration    Command   cfg 12 fdb     FDB Menu   static   Static FDB Menu    aging   Configure FDB aging value 
77. Ta ated indeed nt de it a E 55  Statistics Menu   ali geya U 61 If o  a beeper ares esr eer ces at ie Pe rT ee rE a Eee Eee 56  Menu IntorMalON 2 bt ee 56  Por Sla ee MeN ta a aida tome Ln la tora cio de tomado da dra ido de he 56  SORA asis 57  Bridging Statistics 59  Ethernet Stati Stics e A ME Re 60  Interface Statistics caia a is ean dale 62  Internet Protocol  IP  Statistics    ias 62  Link StaliStiCS rss tees ie ara a o la da do ld rl a Soe doce 63  Pot RMON StatiStiGs   o ad cad alos 64  Layer  Ada AAA A gees ent 65  a RS e E ANAE AOE aria 65  AGP Statistisessa he ra eh ents aaa Cuad a aa aaa a td aa Lcd ene E Ea 65  ERA OE 66  GEA Layer 3 statistics Melia ts 66  GEA  Layer BD StatiStilS viii AAA e 67  N RAEE L E cis he sc ie Bs sae A eae Sah elena ee   ee tage Dianna ae his anne cate Maca  abe se2 Daan ait 2 AA 67  ARS AA O Gotten S ed doch O 68  ARP Statistics  2  io E a eN dee Oe a O DO o 68  DNS  statistic dr it Da 68  OMP SA OS ee ee a E N 69  WIG PIStatiStCS ted dee E Lea ot aa til dae Uan ar ta nit dh a t   dde alo a e dt al tae el lee 70  UDPESTatiStiCS IE EEEE a o cias 71  IGMP Multicast Group Statistics 00    eee cece e ese cess eeeneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseneeeeeeeeee 71  OSPF  StaliSticS MEU ita ita Sas 72  OSP Fglobal statistics ceci ccoo ti a td 72  VRRP Statistics  cut de O a A A a a le Dh ed 75  RIAS di TB as 76  Management Processor sStatiStiCS      oooooonnccnonicinnncnoncnnoncnnnnancnonnc non nn non nro rca rra 
78. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data     To save dump information via FTP TFTP  at the Maintenance  prompt  enter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  163    Maintenance  ptdmp  lt server gt   lt filename gt     Type the FTP TFTP server IP address or hostname as  lt server gt   and the target dump file as  lt filename gt      Enter the user name  if you are using a FTP server     Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server   lt userID gt        Enter the password for the FTP server  if prompted         Enter password for username on FTP server   lt password gt     Clearing dump information    Command   maint cldmp    To clear dump information from flash memory  at the Maintenance  prompt  enter     Maintenance  cldmp    The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message     FLASH dump region cleared     If the flash dump region is already clear  the switch displays the following message     FLASH dump region is already clear     Panic command    Command   maint panic    The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically  reboot     To select panic  at the Maintenance  prompt  enter      gt  gt  Maintenance  panic  A FLASH dump already exists        Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot  y n      Enter y to confirm the command     Confirm dump and reboot  y n   y    A list of messages is displ
79. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in  length  excluding framing bits but including FCS octets  and had either a  bad Frame Check Sequence  FCS  with an integral number of octets   FCS Error  or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets   Alignment Error     etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets   excluding framing bits  but including FCS octets   and had either a bad  Frame Check Sequence  FCS  with an integral number of octets  FCS  Error  or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets  Alignment  Error   Jabber is defined as the condition where any packet exceeds 20  ms  The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms                          etherStatsCollisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet  segment    etherStatsPkts64 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets less than or equal to 64 octets in length  excluding framing bits but    including FCS octets         N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     Table 52 RMON statistics                         Statistic Description   etherStatsPkts65to127 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets greater than 64 octets in length  excluding framing bits but including FCS  octets     etherStatsPkts128to255 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets great
80. a 112  Forwarding Database ConfiguratiON       oonoocnnncnnnnccnnonnnoncnnnonnnnonccnnn conocio nan nn nan n rra nena rra nn nrnn nn rn nn rana r anar ran nn nrnncnns 113  static  FDB CONQUE ween 113  Trunk contig  rati  N  issen prea aaa ea a a dd 113  IP  Tronk Hash GontiguratiGn e isnie da aa a a ia 114  Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash ConfiguratiON      oooocnoccnnnccnnnccnnoncnnoncnonnnnnonc nano ncnnn conocio nn cnn n rra rra nena 114  Link Aggregation Control Protocol configuration 0 0    eee eeesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseeeseeeeenes 115  LAGP Port configuration  ria a ea Ga 115  LAN CU e o 116  Layer COMUN da 117  IP interface Configurati0N muii 117  Default  Gateway COMMU MM ai ici 118  IP  Static   Route configuration  isseire o aotar a taa aere a Aata se tarara i aara ta ae aaret 119  Address Resolution Protocol CONfiguratiON     oooncnnccnnnccnnocnnancncnonncnonncnnrn cnn nn cnn nr nn cnn nn nr rn rra nr n narran 119  Al A A bit Ggledagscaan seas aSpa anA iiaii 119  IP F  orwarding ConfigUtatiON it nia 120    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  5    NR aeaaea a irea oa aaaea aa aie a a aaa taAa 120    Route  Map  configuration iii a 120  IP Access LISE CONTIQUIATION cc at 121  Routing Information Protocol configuration       oooooonnninncnnnnccnoocnnannnononcnnnn conan nn nnn conan rra n rra rra 122  RIP Interface  configurations sian eaa aE AA Aaa 123  RIP Route Redistribution configuration       ooonoccnnnnn
81. a Arba Sean Pa Sabar EE Saba JA Eoas bankke Ta eana EEN 21  SNMP  lnforrmation  Merni saiisine ee A cede Shenae a a aaa eee a aaa aeaa eGA 21  SNMPv3 USM User Table informat Oa a a a E E E A a Eaa raaa Eaa Aa Eaa A EE i iaai 22  SNMPv3 View Table information gosset irienna eirian anrea leorra are reiini ieai 23  SNMPv3 Access Table informati0N        oonooonnnnnnnncnnncnnnccncnnnncnoncnnnrn crono cnn n nro rro n cnn rre 23  SNMPv3 Group Table information      oooconccnnnnccnnononancnononcnanocononcnnnn conan n rra nn r ano n rn n ner n nr enn rn nr n nena n nn rnr ren n nina 24  SNMPv3 Community Table information      oooooccinnccnnnccnnononannononcnnann conc non n cnn o nn nnn nn nn nn rn nn rn n rra rra nn rre 24  SNMPv3 Target Address Table inforMatiON     ooonncinnccnnnccnnonccnnnncnannnnnrnnnnrnn nano nn nn nn nan nn nn n rra rra rra rn rn n nn nn 24  SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information      ooooconcnnnnccnnnccnoocnnannnononcnnnononnn nn nnn conan rra n cra nr r nr nn nc 25  SNMPv3 Notify Table information         ooonncnnnnncnnnccnnocnnancncnonncnon conan cn nan n cnn nro nr non nn nn nn narran rra nr 25  SNMPVS UMD ci a iii 26  SyStOntiNO MAIN ciclo e a bes da a dr 27  Show last 100 syslog messages             eeeseeceseecesnereeeeeesececeaneceanerseeeeeaeeceanessaneseseeeeeaeeseanessanessaneseseeeesanessaneseanerees 27  SyStemiuser OM  italia UT EN ati 28  Layers2  INTOrMATION  ic ae a e ade 29  A aae  ae PEA eh ele eee ee a a ada a erase cared stg 30  Show    
82. aa reen luce a earen lucy aaa raaa araar aar aan a eaa aroia notate 144  ACL Re mark In Profile configuration 0 0    eee eee eeeneeeeee eect eeeeeeeaeeteaeeseaeeseaeeseaueeseaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeesseeseeees 144  ACL Re mark In Profile Update User Priority configuration         oonncnnnnnnnnncnnccnnnncnnncnncncano nn nn nano nnnrnnnnnn conan 144  ACL Re mark Out of Profile configuration         oononconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnocncnonncnnrncnnnn nan nr nn cnn nn n nn rra rra 145  ACL Packet Format Confucio cextecdnscecieu ceustedesctesvet ceuaceeaceshvei  lt cuctensccnesee in einai 145  AGL  Group  CompQurationn  enean A abad 145  Remote Monitoring Configuration    ee ceeceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeessaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesesaeessaeeseaeessaeeseseeseeneeseaeeeeaes 146  RMON history CONQUE ON ac cd 146  RMON  event configuration ssaseninsp iaiia A eee 147  RMON darm Conf gra OT  Aia 147  olaaa InKo Nala S EAE EEE ETE A A 148  Port based port  mMitroriNg  siiis ini AA A 148  Uplink Failure Detection configuration         ee cece esenesesreceeneeeseceesececsanecsenessneeeaeeeeanessanessanesoneneeaeessanessaneseenerees 149  Failure Detection Pair configuration         ooonnocononccnonocnonannnncnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non conoce rn n enn nn nro r rre 149  Link to Monitor configuratiON      oooccconccnnoncnonccnnoncnannnononcnnnn nono n rra n itaate nn 150  Linkto Disable configuratiON civic doi e i   150  DU Ps ittor t ct 151  Saving the active switch COnfiguratiON        ooonocononcc
83. able 175 RMON Alarm Menu options    Command    Description    almtype rising falling either Configures the alarm type as rising  falling  or either  rising or falling      The default is either        rlimit  lt   2147483647  2147483647 gt     to Configures the rising threshold for the sampled statistic  When the  current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold  and the  value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold  a single  event is generated  The default value is 0        flimit  lt   2147483647  2147483647 gt     to Configures the falling threshold for the sampled statistic  When the  current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold  and the  value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold  a  single event is generated  The default value is 0        revtidx  lt 0 65535 gt     Configures the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising  threshold is crossed   The range is from 0 to 65535  The default value is 0        fevtidx  lt 0 65535 gt     Configures the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling  threshold is crossed   The range is from 0 to 65535  The default value is 0        owner  lt 1 127 characters gt  Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this alarm    index   The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters        delete    Deletes this alarm index        cur    Port mirroring  Command   cfg pmirr     Port Mirroring  mirror       monpor
84. al routers for this switch  A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and  an IP address  On each VRRP capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router  a virtual  router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address     Virtual routers are disabled by default     The following table describes the Virtual Router Configuration Menu options     Table 152 VRRP Configuration Menu options    Command  track    Description   Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router  Tracking is a pro   prietary extension to VRRP  used for modifying the standard priority system used  for electing the master router        vrid  lt 1 255 gt     Defines the virtual router ID  This is used in conjunction with addr  below  to  define a virtual router on this switch  To create a pool of VRRP enabled routing  devices which can provide redundancy to each other  each participating VRRP  device must be configured with the same virtual router  one that shares the same  vrid and addr combination    The vrid for standard virtual routers  where the virtual router IP address is not  the same as any virtual server  can be any integer between 1 and 255  The  default value is 1    All vr id values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router s IP  interface belongs        addr  lt IP address gt     Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation  This is  used in conjunction with the vr id  a
85. all  EDB information  ii 30  Clearing entries from the forwarding database 00 0    eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeeseeeseeneeeeaeeseaes 30  Link Aggregation Control Protocol information      ooooccnncccnonccnnoncnannnononcnnnn conan nono n cnn nn narco rana r nr nr 31  LACP UM PP suicidio 31  BOBA information ii AA AAA A AAA ai 32  Spanning A A cots pnrton aiana anea aaa iaeiae esp dacqeaspee Ben paa aA a aeaaea O iaaa a a pecans 33  Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree information       oo onnnnncnnccinonananccnnonnnnnano nan cn nan n raro nonnn cnn nn 35  Common Internal Spanning Tree informatiON     oooooncccnnnccinoccnannnnnonnnnnnnonancn nan nn nan n cnn nr nn nn nn nn nan n rra n nr anar r nana nn cnn 37  THUNK  group information  piisi nre caniche decorada diante 38  VLAN  O Mati A sacle pee aie nelle elon 39  L  ysr 2     neralinformatiO ri ii iaa 39  Layer  g intormation ii datado dis td dada 39    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     3    ROUTE INFORMANT ON MEAE E E ateee odie EE trece 40    Show    all Ro  e NPOFMALO ass 41   A A A EAEE EEO E E A EIO EE EA TORE E E E 42  ARP address list NOM a ON aA a T e AS a ecient ete tel reed 42  Sh  w aAllARP entiy informati  n cua na 42  O PAOA ON mi a a a a a a A Ea A ALATAN 43  OSPF general information niania aiie eiea A id Teat 44  OSPF interface informati0N S a ea a a a a a aea 44  OSPF  Database  OA O a a a cece eee eet a a a aaoi 44  OSPE route  codes
86. ameters Table Configuration Menu options     Table 93 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu options          Command Description   name  lt 1 32 Configures the locally arbitrary  but unique identifier that is associated with this entry   characters gt    mpmodel Configures the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages   snmpvl   sampv2c   snm   pv3   model Selects the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages     usm snmpvl   snmpv2       uname  lt 1 32  characters gt     Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table  on whose behalf the SNMP  messages are generated using this entry        level  noAuthNoPriv authN  oPriv authPriv    Selects the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this  entry  The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without  authentication and without using a privacy protocol  The level authNoPriv means that  the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol   The authPri v means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and  using a privacy protocol        del    Deletes the targetParamsTable entry        cur    Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration     SNMPv3 Notify Table configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 notify  lt notify number gt      SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1    name    tag  del  cur    Menu      Set notify name     Set notify tag     Delete notifyTabl
87. and   cfg ufd fdp  lt FDP number gt  1td     Failure Link to Disable Menu     addport    remport    addtrnk    remtrnk  addkey  remkey    Add port to Link    to Disable    Remove port from Link to Disable    Add trunk to Lin    k to Disable    Remove trunk from Link to Disable    Add adminkey to    Link to Disable    Remove adminkey from Link to Disable       cur    Display current       LtD configuration       The following table describes the Link to Disable  LtD  Menu options  The LtD can consist of any mix of downlink  ports  ports 1 16  and trunk groups that contain only downlink ports and LACP trunk groups that contain only    downlink ports     Table 181 Link to Disable Menu options    Command  addport  lt port number gt     Description    Adds a port to the current LtD group  Only downlink ports  1 16  are allowed in the    LtD        remport  lt port number gt     Removes a port from the current LtD group        addtrunk  lt 1 12 gt     Adds a trunk group to the current LtD group  LtD trunk groups can contain only  downlink ports  1 16         remtrunk  lt 1 12 gt     Removes a trunk group from the current LtD group        addkey  lt LACP port    Adds a LACP trunk group to the current LtD group  LtD LACP trunk groups can          adminkey gt  contain only downlink ports  1 16     remkey  lt LACP port Removes a LACP trunk group from the current LtD group   adminkey gt    cur Displays the current LtD configuration     N8406 023    1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Refe
88. ation          Trunk groups can provide super bandwidth connections between switches or other trunk capable devices  A trunk  is a group of ports that act together  combining their bandwidth to create a single  larger port  Up to 12 trunk groups  can be configured on the switch  with the following restrictions     Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group    Up to six ports trunks can belong to the same trunk group    All ports in a trunk must have the same configuration for speed  flow control  and auto negotiation   Trunking from other devices must comply with Cisco   EtherChannel   technology     By default  port 17 and port 18 are trunked to support an internal switch to switch crosslink trunk  By default   ports 17 and 18 are disabled     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  113    NOTE  See the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide for information on how to use  port trunks     The following table describes the Trunk Group Configuration Menu options     Table 116 Trunk Group Configuration Menu options                   Command Description   add  lt port number gt  Adds a physical port to the current trunk group    rem  lt port number gt  Removes a physical port from the current trunk group   ena Enables the current trunk group    dis Turns the current trunk group off    del Removes the current trunk group configuration    cur Displays current trunk group parameters     IP Trunk Hash configuration  Co
89. ayed     Starting system dump   done     Reboot at 11 54 08 Wednesday October 30  2005       Rebooted because of console PANIC command        Booting complete       Unscheduled system dumps    If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory  the following message is displayed when you log on to  the switch     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  164    Note  A system dump exists in FLASH  The dump was saved  at 13 43 22 Wednesday October 30  2005  Use  maint uudmp to  extract the dump for analysis and  maint cldmp to    clear the FLASH region  The region must be cleared  before another dump can be saved        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L8 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  165    
90. ber which will be used to forward frames  which are not VLAN tagged  The default number for all ports except  Port 19 is 1    Note  VLAN 4095 is a VLAN for switch management interface        name  lt 1 64 characters gt  none    Sets a name for the port  maximum 64 characters   The assigned port  name displays next to the port number on some information and  statistics screens        rmon enable disable    Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port  The default is  disabled  RMON must be enabled for any RMON configurations to  function        tag enable disable    Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port  The default is disabled        tagpvid enable disable    Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence  When disabled  the VLAN  tag is removed from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID   The default is enabled                 media Displays the current port s transmission media  copper or fiber  This option is only available on Ports 21 24    fiber Configures the port s transmission media as fiber   This option is only available on Ports 21 24    copper Configures the port s transmission media as copper   This option is only available on Ports 21 24    automedia Configures the port s transmission media as auto     This option is only available on Ports 21 24        brate  lt 0 262143 gt  dis    Limits the number of broadcast packets per second to the specified  value  If disabled  dis   the port forwards all broadcast packets        mrate  lt 0 262143 gt  di
91. ble 160 Access Control Configuration Menu options  Command Description  acl  lt 1 762 gt  Displays Access Control List  ACL  configuration menu        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  139    Table 160 Access Control Configuration Menu options    Command Description  group  lt 1 762 gt  Displays ACL Group configuration menu   cur       Displays the current Access Control parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  140    Access Control List configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt      ACL 1 Menu   ethernet  ipv4  tcpudp  meter  re mark       AC  AC  set  Set  set    L       L    pktfimt  egrport  action  stats  reset       cur    hernet Header Options Menu  Header Options Menu  P UDP Header Options Menu    Metering Configuration Menu   Re mark Configuration Menu   to filter specific packet format types   to filter for packets egressing this port  filter action    Enable disable statistics for this acl  Reset filtering parameters  Display current filter configuration       These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List  ACL   The following table describes  the ACL Configuration Menu options     Table 161 ACL Configuration Menu options                   Command Description   ethernet Displays the ACL Ethernet configuration menu   ipv4 Displays the ACL IP version 4 configuration menu   tcpudp Displays the ACL TCP UDP configuration menu   meter Displays the ACL m
92. bove  to configure the same virtual router on  each participating VRRP device  The default address is 0 0 0 0       if  lt 1 255 gt     Selects a switch IP interface  If the IP interface has the same IP address as the  addr option above  this switch is considered the    owner    of the defined virtual  router  An owner has a special priority of 255  highest  and will always assume  the role of master router  even if it must preempt another virtual router which has  assumed master routing authority  This preemption occurs even if the preem  option below is disabled  The default value is 1        prio  lt 1 254 gt     Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server  This can be any integer  between 1 and 254  The default value is 100    During the master router election process  the routing device with the highest  virtual router priority number wins  If there is a tie  the device with the highest IP  interface address wins  If this virtual router s IP address  addr  is the same as  the one used by the IP interface  the priority for this virtual router will automatically  be set to 255  highest     When priority tracking is used   cfg 13 vrrp track or   cfg 13 vrrp vr   track   this base priority value can be modified  according to a number of performance and operational criteria        adver  lt 1 255 gt     Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements  This can be any  integer between 1 and 255 seconds  The default value is 1        N8406 023 1Gb In
93. ccepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity           snmpInTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have been  accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity   snmpOutTooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were generated by the    SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is too big        snmpOutNoSuchNames    The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were generated by the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status is noSuchName                       snmpOutBadValues The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were generated by the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is badValue    snmpOutReadOnlys Not in use    snmpOutGenErrs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were generated by the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is genErr    snmpOutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get Request Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have  been generated by the SNMP protocol entity    snmpOutGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get Next Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have been  generated by the SNMP protocol entity    snmpOutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have       been generated by the SNMP protocol entity        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  80    Table 75 
94. cnn nr 77  Packet StallStCS sites A E a SE esa ae E Pat na AAE A Maal at ate ate tat tala ht Oo at aL 77  TOP PStAti Stic ss  ages ec e ee ake Od Sas Se NURSE hk Sh ORs ULB SALES ek Leh ST Sonn ed EIS ec 78  WD RP SiatiSticS  stati ses ets bs e veda cundo eee Ea ees aura aida ca a nea ed e ol E 78  CPU PStatiStiCs ai e iaa ie vase tabs exudates 78  Access Control List  ACE  statistics MON  rtorras iria tia 79    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  4    E E E EE i EEEE AA EAE EE EA EEE E bohtad wohl  coated awe tacatel tadacodilas boi tad wht sited oe 79    SNMP  Statistics  2 A atti a a itis edie enti inet 79  NTP Stati StiC Soiano anandan ua aant aana nata at   sovavte egeaven supeawth  edvevensaguawet  veces 81  Uplink Failure Detection statistics  siipeni n eae a a a aa E N a A a ETEA 82  MAME TAa o ARE ETE EATE AA E T E A 82  Configuration Menu  A a ae a o oiea e or ne saren aini 83  MOM O caaetes duane adenaebey acu npis censiebas austieas des debes dene eid cenue 83  Viewing  applying  reverting  and Saving CHANGES    eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeeeeaeeesaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeees 83  Viewing  pending  Changes iii A aca 84  Applying pending CHANGES cocinada id did 84  FROVEMING  Changes vi   cortical ol 84  Saving the configuration iii ad 84  A NN 85  System contiguralO Mii   a 85  system hostilog  configura aiii 86  Secure Shell Server COMPIQUIATION         eee eeeeeesececeeneeeenereeeeeseeecenecsanersenereaeessaeecsaness
95. cnnnncnoncnnnonnnnnano non n corn cnn nn cnn nn nn nn n nr r rana n nena 124  Open Shortest Path First configuration        oooonncnnnnnnnnnccnnncnnnncncnonnononnn nn nn nn n cnn acc nn anna n nr rra rre 124  OSPF Area Index configuratiO tico iia 125  OSPF Summary Range Configuration          oooooocconccnonccnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnanononnnnonnr conan nn datod rancia r nr narran 127  OSPF Interface configuration  dd 127  OSPF Virtual Link ConfiguratiON        oooocnnnnnccnnoconancnnnonncnnanononnnnnonn aa anaa nc nn nr aeaaee aeaa aaae Rea rre aaan nina 128  OSPF Host Entry Configuration cuasi a 128  OSPF Route Redistribution configuration         ooooccnnnnnninnccnonccnonncnnanononcc nono nan nn nn n rra nc nn rn nn 129  OSPF MDS  Key Configuration   ciao A A 129  IGMP COnfiQguration  otitis a 130  IG MP SNOOPINO CONfQULA ON cita cat 130  IGMP static multicast router configuration     ooooocnnncnnccnonccnnoncnnnanonanncnnrnn nano corno nnn non nn 131  IGMP filtering contiguration cui lia 131  IGMP fiter def NO soci Ains 131  IGMP filtering port CoOnfiguUratiON        ooononncnnccnnnccnnonnnnnnncnonnnonon nn nan no non nn nnn conan nen nn n rn rre rre n narra 132  Domain Name System iconfiguratio veias 132  Bootstrap Protocol Relay configuration      oooocccionccnoccnoncncnoncnananonon ccoo conan cnn nn cnn nc nn cnn o nn ran n rr nn rana r nan r nan nennnncnes 134  Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol CONfiguratiON       ooooocccnnccinnccnocccnonnnnnoncnnnnnnnon nn nnn nn cnn rca oc
96. col        ipInDiscards    The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to  prevent their continued processing  but which were discarded  for example  for lack of  buffer space     This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly        ipInDelivers    The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols   including ICMP         ipOutRequests    The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols  including ICMP   supplied to IP in requests for transmission   This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams        ipOutDiscards    The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent  their transmission to their destination  but which were discarded  for example  for lack  of buffer space     This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such  packets met this  discretionary  discard criterion        ipDefaultTTL    The default value inserted into the Time To Live  TTL  field of the IP header of  datagrams originated at this switch  whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the  transport layer protocol     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  67    Route statistics    Command   stats 13 route    Route statistics     ipRoutesCur  7 ipRoutesHighWater   ipRoutesMax  512       The following table describes the Route statistics     Table 58 Route statistics             Statistics Descr
97. contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the switch after any one of  the following occurs       The switch administrator forces a switch panic  The panic option  found in the Maintenance Menu  causes the  switch to dump state information to flash memory  and then causes the switch to reboot       The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination  Ctr1 shift 6  on a device that is  attached to the console port       The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot   The following table describes the Maintenance Menu options     Table 186 Maintenance Menu options    Command  sys    Usage  Displays the System Maintenance Menu        fdb    Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu        debug    Displays the Debug Menu        arp    Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu        route    Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu        igmp    Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu        uudmp    Displays dump information in uuencoded format        ptdmp    Saves the system dump information via TFTP        cldmp    Clears dump information from flash memory        panic    Dumps MP information to flash and reboots        tsdmp    Dumps all switch information  statistics  and configuration        pttsdmp    Redirects the technical support dump  tsdmp  to an external TFTP server     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  159    System maintenance options    Command   maint sys    
98. cur Display current RADIUS configuration       NOTE  See the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide for information on RADIUS     The following table describes the RADIUS Server Configuration Menu options     Table 82 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu options                      Command Description   prisrv  lt IP address gt  Sets the primary RADIUS server address    secsrv  lt IP address gt  Sets the secondary RADIUS server address    secret  lt 1 32 characters gt  This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS  server s     secret2  lt 1 32 characters gt  This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the  RADIUS server s     port  lt UDP port number gt  Enter the number of the User Datagram Protocol  UDP  port to be  configured  between 1500 3000  The default is 1645    retries  lt 1 3 gt  Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a  different RADIUS server  The range is 1 3 requests The default is 3  requests    timeout  lt 1 10 gt  Sets the amount of time  in seconds  before a RADIUS server    authentication attempt is considered to have failed  The range is 1 10  seconds  The default is 3 seconds    telnet enable disable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet SSH   HTTP HTTPS  The default value is disabled  This command does not  apply when secure backdoor  secba  is enabled    secbd enable disable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door using secure password for  telnet SSH  HTTP HTTPS  T
99. d in the generation of SNMP traps   address ip gt    port  lt transport Configures a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps   address port gt    taglist  lt 1 255 Configures a list of tags  up to 255 characters maximum  that are used to select target  characters gt  addresses for a particular operation    pname  lt 1 32 Defines the name as defined in  cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 tparam name   characters gt    del Deletes the Target Address Table entry    eur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L8 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  97    SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 tparam  lt tparam number gt      SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1  name  mpmodel    Menu     Set targetParams name    Set       model    uname  level  del  cur    message processing model   security model   Set USM user name   Set minimum level of security   Delete targetParamsTable entry   Display current targetParamsTable configuration    Set       You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine  This  table contains parameters that are used to generate a message  The parameters include the message processing  model  for example  SNMPv3  SNMPv2c  SNMPvi   the security model  for example  USM   the security name   and the security level  noAuthnoPriv  authNoPriv  Or authPriv      The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Par
100. d is disabled by default    ports disablelenable When enabled  the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active  port on the same VLAN  A port is considered    active    if it has a link and is  forwarding traffic  This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports  as the master  This command is disabled by default    cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router              VRRP Virtual Router Group configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp group    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  136     VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu   track   Priority Tracking Menu  vrid   Set virtual router ID  if   Set interface number  prio Set router priority       adver Set advertisement interval   preem Enable disable preemption   ena Enable virtual router   dis Disable virtual router   del Delete virtual router   cur Display current VRRP virtual router configuration             The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router  which  forces all virtual routers on the switch to either be master or backup as a group  A virtual router is defined by its  virtual router ID and an IP address  On each VRRP capable routing device participating in redundancy for this  virtual router  a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address     The following table describes the Virtual Router Group Configurati
101. dTypes   snmpInNoSuchNames   snmpInReadOnlys   snmpInTotalReqVars   snmpInGetRequests   snmpInSetRequests   snmpInTraps   snmpOutNoSuchNames   snmpOutReadOnlys   snmpOutGetRequests   snmpOutSetRequests   snmpOutTraps   snmpProxyDrops                    DODDONDTDAONUDTAOVCAVOCO       On OO  O O ONO  O O OREO     iS             The following table describes the Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP  statistics   Table 75 SNMP statistics                Statistics Description   snmpInPkts The total number of messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport  service    snmpInBadVersions The total number of SNMP messages  which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version    snmpInBadC  tyNames The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that used an  SNMP community name not known to the switch    snmpInBadC  tyUses The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity that    represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community  named in the message        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  79    Table 75 SNMP statistics    Statistics       snmpInASNParseErrs    Description   The total number of ASN 1  Abstract Syntax Notation One  or BER  Basic Encoding  Rules   errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP  messages received    The Open Systems Interconnection  OSI  method of specifying abstract objects is  called ASN 1  
102. dd the argument  clear  to clear UFD statistics        clrmp    Clears all Management Processor statistics        dump    Dumps all switch statistics  Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging  switch performance  If you want to capture dump data to a file  set your communication  software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump  command        Port Statistics Menu    Command   stats port  lt port number gt      Port Statistics    8021x  brg  ether  ist   ip  link  rmon  clear    This menu displays traffic stati    enu     802 1x stats  bridging   dot1    Ethernet   dot3    interface   if    Internet Protocol  how link stats   how RMON stats   lear all port stats    NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW    stats   stats  stats     IP         stats       S  S  S  S  S  S  S  G       stics on a port by port basis     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  56    The following table describes the Port Statistics Menu options     Table 45 Port Statistics Menu options    Command Usage    8021x    Displays IEEE 802 1x statistics                         brg Displays bridging     dot1     statistics for the port    ether Displays Ethernet   dot3     statistics for the port    if Displays interface statistics for the port    ip Displays Internet Protocol statistics for the port    link Displays link statistics for the port    rmon Displays Remote Monitoring  RMON  statistics for the port   clear Clears all the statistics on the 
103. define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL  The following table describes the IP version 4  Filter Configuration Menu options     Table 163 IPv4 Filter Configuration Menu options  Command Description  sip  lt IP address gt   lt IP mask gt  Defines a source IP address for the ACL  If defined  traffic with this source    IP address will match this ACL  Specify an IP address in dotted decimal  notation  For example  100 10 1 1          dip  lt IP address gt   lt IP mask gt  Defines a destination IP address for the ACL  If defined  traffic with this  destination IP address will match this ACL  For example  100 10 1 2  proto  lt 0 255 gt  Defines an IP protocol for the ACL  If defined  traffic from the specified    protocol matches this filter  Specify the protocol number  Listed below are  some of the well known protocols   Number Name             1 icmp  2 igmp  6 tcp  17 udp  89 ospf  112 vrrp  tos  lt 0 255 gt  Defines a Type of Service value for the ACL  For more information on  ToS  see RFC 1340 and 1349   reset Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values   cur Displays the current IPV4 parameters     ACL TCP UDP Filter configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  tcpudp     Filtering TCP UDP Menu   sport Set to filter on TCP UDP source port  dport Set to filter on TCP UDP destination port       flags Set to filter TCP UDP flags  reset Reset all fields  cur Display current parameters       This menu allows you to define TCP UDP matching criteria
104. der Router count  AS Boundary Router count  LSA count   5  LSA Checksum sum   0x2237B  Summary   noSummary                   OSPF interface information    Command   info 13 ospf if  lt 1 255 gt     Address 10 10 12 1  Area 0 0 0 1  Admin Status UP   Router ID 10 10 10 1  State DR  Priority 1   Designated Router  ID  10 10 10 1  Ip Address 10 10 12 1  Backup Designated Router  ID  10 10 14 1  Ip Address 10 10 12   Timer intervals  Hello 10  Dead 40  Wait 1663  Retransmit 5   Transit delay 1   Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4  Authentication type none                   OSPF Database information  Command   info 13 ospf dbase     OSPF Database Menu   advrtr   LS Database info for an Advertising Router  asbrsum ASBR Summary LS Database info  dbsumm LS Database summary  ext External LS Database info    nw etwork LS Database info   nssa SSA External LS Database info  rtr Router LS Database info   self Self Originated LS Database info  summ Network Summary LS Database info  all All                The following table describes the OSPF Database information menu options     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  44    Table 33 OSPF Database information       Command    advrtr  lt router id  A B C D  gt     Usage    Takes advertising router as a parameter  Displays all the  Link State Advertisements  LSAs  in the LS database that  have the advertising router with the specified router ID  for  example  20 1 1 1        asbrsum  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     lt link
105. ds     The default password for the administrator account is admin  To change the default password     1    Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password   2    From the Main Menu  use the following command to access the Configuration Menu     Main   cfg    The Configuration Menu is displayed      Configuration Menu   sys   System wide Parameter Menu  port Port Menu  12 Layer 2 Menu  13 Layer 3 Menu  qos QOS Menu  acl Access Control List Menu       rmon RMON Menu   pmirr Port Mirroring Menu   ufd Uplink Failure Detection Menu   dump Dump current configuration to script file   ptcfg Backup current configuration to FTP TFTP server  gtcfg Restore current configuration from FTP TFTP server  cur Display current system access configuration             3    From the Configuration Menu  use the following command to select the System Menu      gt  gt  Configuration  sys    The System Menu is displayed     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  17     System Menu   syslog  sshd  radius  tacacst  ntp  ssnmp  access  date  time  timezon    Syslog Menu   SSH Server Menu   RADIUS Authentication Menu  TACACS  Authentication Menu  NTP Server Menu   System SNMP Menu   System Access Menu   Set system dat   Set system tim             olddst  dlight   idle   notice  bannr  hprompt  bootp   dhcp    reminders    cur         Set system timezone  daylight savings    Set system DST for US   Set system daylight savings   Set timeout for idle CLI sessions   Set lo
106. e     Designated port    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     33    The following table describes the STP parameters     Table 22 STP parameters    Parameter  Current Root    Description    Shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree  Information includes  the priority  hex  and MAC address of the root           Path Cost Path cost is the total path cost to the root bridge  It is the summation of the path cost  between bridges  up to the root bridge    Port The current root port refers to the port on the switch that receives data from the    current root  Zero  0  indicates the root bridge of the STP        Priority  bridge     The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the  STP root bridge        Hello    The hello time parameter specifies  in seconds  how often the root bridge transmits a  configuration bridge protocol data unit  BPDU   Any bridge that is not the root bridge  uses the root bridge hello value           axAge    The maximum age parameter specifies  in seconds  the maximum time the bridge  waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures  the STP network        FwdDel    The forward delay parameter specifies  in seconds  the amount of time that a bridge  port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state        Aging    The aging time parameter specifies  in seconds  the amount of time the bridge waits  without r
107. e Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options     Table 155 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options    Command Description  ifs disablelenable When enabled  the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP    interface active on this switch  An IP interface is considered active when there is  at least one active port on the same VLAN  This helps elect the virtual routers with  the most available routes as the master  This command is disabled by default    ports disablelenable When enabled  the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active  port on the same VLAN  A port is considered    active    if it has a link and is  forwarding traffic  This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports  as the master  This command is disabled by default    cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router           VRRP Interface configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp if  lt 1 255 gt      VRRP Interface 1 Menu   auth   Set authentication types    passw   Set plain text password  del   Delete interfac  cur   Display current VRRP interface configuration          This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers   The interface number  1 to 255  represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured     The following table describes the VRRP Interface Config
108. e access list    disable Disables the access list    delete Deletes the access list    current Displays the current Access List configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     121    Routing Information Protocol configuration    Command   cfg 13 rip     Routing Information Protocol Menu   if   RIP Interface Menu  update Set update period in seconds    redist RIP Route Redistribute Menu   on Globally turn RIP ON   off Globally turn RIP OFF   current Display current RIP configuration       The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters  This option is turned off by default     The following table describes the RIP Configuration Menu options     Table 132 RIP Configuration Menu options          Command Description   if  lt 1 255 gt  Displays the RIP Interface menu    update  lt 1 120 gt  Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates  in  seconds     The default value is 30 seconds   redist fixed static ospfleospf Displays the RIP Route Redistribute menu                 on Globally turns RIP on   off Globally turns RIP off  This is the default   current Displays the current RIP configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  122    RIP Interface configuration    Command   cfg 13 rip if  lt 1 255 gt      RIP Interface 1 Menu     version  supply  listen  poison  split  trigg  mcast  default  metric  auth  key  enable  disable      Set RIP version   Enable disabl
109. e entry     Display current notifyTable configuration       SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps  A notification typically monitors a system for particular  events or conditions  and generates Notification Class messages based on these events or conditions     The following table describes the SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration menu options   Table 94 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu options             Command Description   name  lt 1 32 Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry    characters gt    tag  lt 1 255 Defines a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select   characters gt  entries in the Target Address Table  Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable  that  matches the value of this tag  is selected    del Deletes the notify table entry    cur Displays the current notify table configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  98    System Access configuration    Command   cfg sys access     System Access Menu   mgmt   Management Network Definition Menu  user   User Access Control Menu  passwords   http   Enable disable HTTP  Web  access  https HTTPS Web Access Menu    wport Set HTTP  Web  server port number   snmp Set SNMP access control   tnet Enable disable Telnet access   tnport Set Telnet server port number   tport Set the TFTP Port for the system   cut Display current system access configuration             The following table de
110. e supplying route updates  Enable disable listening to route updates  Enable disable poisoned reverse  Enable disable split horizon  Enable disable triggered updates  Enable disable multicast updates   Set default route action   Set metric   Set authentication type   Set authentication key   Enable interface   Disable interface          current Display current RIP interface configuration       The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters  This option is turned off by default     NOTE  Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2     The following table describes the RIP Interface Configuration Menu options     Table 133 RIP Interface Configuration Menu options    Command  version 1 2 both    Description  Configures the RIP version used by this interface   The default value is version 2        supply disablelenable    When enabled  the switch supplies routes to other routers  This  command is enabled by default        listen disable enable    When enabled  the switch learns routes from other routers  This  command is enabled by default        poison disablelenable    When enabled  the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse   When disabled  the switch uses only split horizon  The default value is  disabled       split disable enable    Enables or disables split horizon  The default value is enabled        trigg disablelenable    Enables or disables Triggered Updates  Triggered Updates are used to
111. e the packets that  higher level protocols requested to be transmitted  and which were addressed to a   multicast address at this sublayer  including those that were discarded or not sent    For a MAC layer protocol  this includes both group and functional addresses        Discards   IfHCIn    The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no  errors were detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher layer protocol  One  possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space           Errors    IfHCIn    For packet oriented interfaces  the number of inbound packets that contained errors  preventing them from being delivered to a higher layer protocol    For character oriented or fixed length interfaces  the number of inbound  transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a  higher layer protocol        Octets   IfHCOut    The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface  including framing  characters        UcastPkts   IfHCOut    The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted   and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer   including those that were discarded or not sent        BroadcastPkts   IfHCOut    The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted   and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer  including those  that were discarded or not 
112. eSerialNumber  NECO1A 6X00125                EnclosureName  Default Chassis Name    BayNumber  1    Switch is up 0 days  14 hours  56 minutes and 22 seconds   Last boot  17 25 38 Mon Jan 8  2006  software reset     MAC address  00 10 00 01 00 01 IP  If 1  address  10 14 4 16  Revision    Switch Serial No    Spare Part No     Software Version 1 0 0  FLASH imagel   active configuration     System information includes     System date and time   Switch model name and number   Rack name and location   Time of last boot   MAC address of the switch management processor   IP address of the switch   Software image file and version number   Current configuration block  active  backup  or factory default   Login banner  if one is configured    Show last 100 syslog messages    Command   info sys log    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS        27    Severity Message     ar    system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system   system                 GS GiG a a G 0  ut 44 4 Ei G l    CS EEA GCA CE 0C AGC C G GC e GA         o                   OO MM WO     A E EE aE E s                    a B ra B ea B ea B ea B O a O ea O ea O a O ea O a O ea B a B ea B ea Ma a BA ea B ea          AE E E E O PN E A RN ON CE  ae       Each message contains a date and time field and has a severity level associated with it  One of eight different  prefixes is u
113. eceiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the  Forwarding Database        Priority  port     The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  designated port  In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a  single segment  the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for  the segment           Cost The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a  segment  Generally speaking  the faster the port  the lower the path cost   State The State field shows the current state of the port  The State field can be one of the    following  BLOCKING  LISTENING  LEARNING  FORWARDING  or DISABLED        Designated bridge    Shows information about the bridge connected to each port  if applicable  Information  includes the priority  hex  and MAC address of the Designated Bridge        Designated port    The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     34    Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree information    Command   info 12 stp    upfast disabled  update 40    Spanning Tree Group 1  On  VLANs  1 3 4095    Current Root  Path Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel  8000 00 00 01 00 19 00 0 0 9 20 15    Parameters  Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging  32768 9 20 15 300       Port Prio Cost Stat Designated Bridge Des Port Type    o       ESG 8000 00 00 01 00 19 00 8017
114. ed       SSH 3 0 1 for Linux  freeware      SecureCRTO 4 1 8  VanDyke Technologies  Inc       OpenSSH_3 9 for Linux  FC 3      SCP commands for Linux  FC3      PuTTY Release 0 58  Simon Tatham  for Windows   NOTE  The switch implementation of SSH is based on versions 1 5 and 2 0  and supports SSH clients from    version 1 0 through version 2 0  SSH clients of other versions are not supported  You may configure the client  software to use protocol SSH version 1 or version 2     By default  SSH service is not enabled on the switch  Once the IP parameters are configured  you can access the  command line interface to enable SSH     To establish an SSH connection with the switch  run the SSH program on the workstation by issuing the ssh  command  followed by the user account name and the switch IP address               gt  gt    ssh  lt user gt   lt 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch IP address gt        You will then be prompted to enter your password     NOTE  The first time you run SSH from the workstation  a warning message might appear  At the prompt   enter yes to continue     Accessing the switch    To enable better switch management and user accountability  the switch provides different levels or classes of user  access  Levels of access to the CLI and Web management functions and screens increase as needed to perform  various switch management tasks  The three levels of access are       User   User interaction with the switch is completely passive  nothing can be changed on the sw
115. ed to display Quality of Service  QoS  information     Table 37 QoS menu options       Command Usage    8021p Displays the QoS 802 1p Information Menu        802 1p information  Command   info qos 8021p    Current priority to COS queue information   Priority COSq Weight    0    0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7    NONMNNNFRFR EF    Current port priority information   Priority COSq Weight    0    0  0  0       The following table describes the IEEE 802 1p priority to COS queue information   Table 38 802 1p Priority to COS Queue information             Field Description   Priority Displays the 802 1p Priority level    Cosq Displays the Class of Service queue    Weight Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue        The following table describes the IEEE 802 1p port priority information   Table 39 802 1p Port Priority information             Field Description   Port Displays the port number   Priority Displays the 802 1p Priority level   Cosq Displays the Class of Service queue   Weight Displays the scheduling weight     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  49    ACL information  Command   info acl    Current ACL information     Filter 1 profile        Ethernet     VID   1 0xfff  Actions   Set COS to 0  Filter 2 profile        Ethernet    VID   1 0xfff  Actions   Permit    No ACL groups configured        Access Control List  ACL  information provides configuration parameters for each Access Control List  It also shows  which ACLs are included in each ACL
116. eeceseeceseeeeseeeeeaeeteaeeceaeecsaaeeeaeeesaeessaeessacesesaeeesaeessaeessaeeseneeeeaeeesaes 99  Management Networks Configuration             cceeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseaeesseaeeseaeeseeeeeaeees 99  UserAccess  Control  configurations   sireil aprenia a 100  User ID ConfigUrtiO siii 100  HTTPS ACCESS  CONPIQUIPATION seu  cc  fsctescecdgdeekecntiepecstacpadcntacseadhebephtcnarghsdueaapesvescesesdheneghe cateeghacheasatssecnaghideensgts 101  Port configuration tit da lia 101  TSmporarily disabling A Por  ias ac 102  Portlink configuratiO e ctcc ri ral aa aa odaia eA athe shh Iria dots SAARE na SASE RERA 103  Port ACL Q0S configura iii AA AA AAA 103  LIC ina 104  802  1x COMU Mii A A id taaan  104  802 1x Global  Configuration  nisso ii a aE 105  802  1X  Port configuration vom di Eta 106  Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol   Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configuration                    cccesesceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 107  Common Internal Spanning Tree configuration       oooocnnccnnnccnnnccnonncnnnnnnnancnnnn conan nn non conan n cnn nn ran nn nan nn nn nn nnnnncnns 108  GIST bridge configurati  N  coman e el a 108  CIST port configuration A ia na 109  Spanning Tree configuration      ooooonnnnnnncnnnonnnonncnnoncnnnn conocio non nn cnn rene 110  Bridge Spanning Tree configuratiON      o oooconnccnnnncnononcnnnnnnncnnnarnnnonnnnnno conan nn nn nr rr nn rn nn rare near near cnn rn rre rnna nene 111  Spanning  Tree port CONPFIQUIATION viii ii
117. efault command line interface for this switch is the AOS CLI  To access the AOS CLI  enter the following  command and reset this switch      gt  gt  Switch  boot cli mode aos    Users can select the CLI mode upon login  if the  boot  prompt command is enabled  Only an administrator  connected through the console port can view and enable  boot prompt  When  boot prompt is enabled  the  first user to log in can select either the CLI mode  Subsequent users must use the selected CLI mode  until all users  have logged out     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  158       Maintenance Menu    Introduction    The Maintenance Menu is used for debugging purposes  enabling you to generate a technical support dump of the  critical state information in the switch  and to clear entries in the Forwarding Database and the Address Resolution  Protocol  ARP  and routing tables  This menu is available only from an administrator and operator login     Menu information    Command   maint     Maintenance Menu     sys  fdb  debug  arp  route    igmp   uudmp  ptdmp  cldmp  panic  tsdmp  pttsdmp    System Maintenance Menu   Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu  Debugging Menu   ARP Cache Manipulation Menu   IP Route Manipulation Menu   IGMP Multicast Group Menu   Uuencode FLASH dump   tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server   Clear FLASH dump   Dump state information to FLASH and reboot  Tech support dump   tftp put tech support dump to tftp server          Dump information 
118. eneresseeesaeessanessnereeneeeeaes 87  RADIUS server configuration          ee eeeeeeseeeseeeeseeteseeeesneeesaeessaeessaceeeseesesaeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseaaeeeaeeesaeeseaeeseaeeseneeeses 89  TACACS  Server CONfiQUIATION  An 90  NTP serverconfiguratON e  tii ala 91  System  SNMP  Configuration   isi  ecu  osecvscgteves id 92  SNMPVS COMPMQUATION sss  2 c 5  seee Shsclecesectheccdhsthenegltchedebtsueeeatsdeeccdesdeenechsseeaedeiianesctsddecephccenneglsdheaedatdenacani diated 93  User Security Model Configuration       oooonccncncnnnccnnoncnncnncnonncnnnnnnnonn cono nr nnn corn n cnn nn rana rre n rre n nena cenar 94  SNMPV3 VIEW COMPQUIATI ON cific ccie2e iaa 94  View based Access Control Model configuratiON        oooooccnnnccnnnnccncocononcnonononanc conan ccoo cnn cnn n rra rra n nn nana rnnnnnns 95  SINS AAC tnt tnnEnnEAEEAEEEAEEEANEEAEEEANEEAEE EAEE EAEEE Enne nnn eneee EEEa 96  SNMPv3 Community Table configuration oo    eee eee eeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseaeeseaeeeseeeessaeeseaeeseeesseeeeeeeeseaes 96  SNMPv3 Target Address Table ConfiguratiON      ooonncnnnnnnnccnoccnnanncnannnononcnnnn no non nc nan conan rca n cnn rr n rn rn nera 97  SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration       oonncnnnccnnnccnooccnonnnnoncnnna conan cc nan nn nano n cnn cc nnn nr nn cnn cnn 98  SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration        ooooconnnnnnccnoncncnonncnnanononcnnn conan non n nn PEA ea AAEE Saee cnn nr rn n rra rra nn AREE NEEE KER 98  System ACCESS configuration 0 0    eee eee eeen
119. ent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  148    Table 177 Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options    Command Description   add  lt mirrored port gt  in out both Adds the port to be mirrored  This command also allows you to enter  the direction of the traffic  It is necessary to specify the direction  because    e Ifthe source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the  mirrored direction is ingress or both  ingress and egress   the  frame is sent to the mirrored port    e Ifthe destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port  and the mirrored direction is egress or both  the frame is sent to  the monitoring port              rem  lt mirrored port gt  Removes the mirrored port   delete Deletes this monitored port   cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port     Uplink Failure Detection configuration  Command   cfg ufd     Uplink Failure Detection Menu   fdp   Failure Detection Pair Menu    on   Globally turn Uplink Failure Detection ON  off   Globally turn Uplink Failure Detection OFF  cur   Display current Uplink Failure Detection configuration       Uplink Failure Detection  UFD  supports network fault tolerance in network adapter teams  Use this menu to  configure Failure Detection Pairs of one Links to Monitor  LtM  group and one Links to Disable  LtD  group  When  each UFD is enabled and a Failure Detection Pair is configured  the switch automatically disables ports in the LtD if  it detects a failure in the LtM  The failure conditions 
120. ent global 802 1x parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  105    802 1x Port configuration    Command   cfg 12 8021x port  lt port number gt      802 1x Port Configuration Menu   access control mode   EAP Request Identity quiet time interval  EAP Request Identity retransmission timeout  EAP Request retransmission timeout   server authentication request timeout    mode    qtperiod  txperiod  suptmout  svrtmout  maxreq  raperiod  reauth  default  global  cur    Set  set  set  set  Set          set  Set  set    max number of       EAP Request retransmissions    reauthentication time interval   reauthentication status to on or off   Restore default 802 1x configuration   Apply current global 802 1x configuration to this port  Display current 802 1x configuration       The 802 1x port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the switch  These settings  override the global 802 1x parameters     The following table describes the 802 1x Port Configuration Menu options     Table 106 802 1x Port Configuration Menu options       Command    mode force   unauth auto force auth    Description    Sets the type of access control for the port    e force unauth  the port is unauthorized unconditionally    e auto  the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  RADIUS server    e force auth  the port is authorized unconditionally  allowing all traffic    The default value is force auth        qtperiod 
121. er  lt 1 255 gt  Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements  This can be any  integer between 1 and 255 seconds  The default is 1   preem disable enable Enables or disables master preemption  When enabled  if the virtual router group    is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master  this virtual  router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control  Note that even  when preen is disabled  this virtual router will always preempt any other master  if this switch is the owner  the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the  same   By default  this option is enabled                 ena Enables the virtual router group    dis Disables the virtual router group    del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration    cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group     VRRP Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp group track     Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu   ifs   Enable disable tracking other interfaces    ports   Enable disable tracking VLAN switch ports  cur   Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration          NOTE  If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled  then the tracking option will be available only under  group option  The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  137    The following table describes th
122. er Configuration Menu options     Table 83 TACACS  Server Configuration Menu options    Command Description   Defines the primary TACACS  server address    Defines the secondary TACACS  server address    This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS  server s    This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS   server s     Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured  between 1   65000  The  default is 49    Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a  different TACACS  server  The range is 1 3 requests  The default is 3  requests    Sets the amount of time  in seconds  before a TACACS  server  authentication attempt is considered to have failed  The range is 4 15  seconds  The default is 5 seconds    Enables or disables the TACACS  back door for telnet  The telnet  command also applies to SSH SCP connections and the Browser based  Interface  BBI   The default value is disabled  This command does not apply  when secure backdoor  secba  is enabled    Enables or disables the TACACS  back door using secure password for  telnet SSH  HTTP HTTPS  The default value is disabled  This command  does not apply when backdoor  telnet  is enabled     prisrv  lt IP address gt        secsrv  lt IP address gt        secret  lt 1 32 characters gt        secret2  lt 1 32 characters gt        port  lt TCP port number gt        retries  lt 1 3 gt        timeout  lt 4 15 gt        telnet enable disable       secbd enable disable
123. er than 127 octets in length  excluding framing bits but including  FCS octets     etherStatsPkts256to511 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets greater than 255 octets in length  excluding framing bits but including  FCSoctets     etherStatsPkts512to1023 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets greater than 511 octets in length  excluding framing bits but including  FCS octets     etherStatsPkts1024to1518 The total number of packets  including bad packets  received that were   Octets greater than 1023 octets in length  excluding framing bits but including    FCS octets         Layer 2 statistics    Command   stats 12     Layer 2 Statistics Menu     fdb   Show FDB stats  lacp   Show LACP stats       The following table describes the Layer 2 statistics menu options     Table 53 Layer 2 statistics menu options          Command Usage  fdb Displays the Forwarding Database statistics   lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics        FDB statistics    Command   stats 12 fdb    FDB statistics     current  91 hiwat  91    This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database  including the  number of current entries and the maximum number of entries ever recorded     The following table describes the Forwarding Database  FDB  statistics     Table 54 Forwarding Database statistics          Statistic Description  current Current number of entri
124. er the new election  the virtual router forced into   backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases    e This switch owns the virtual router  the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP  interface are the same    e This switch s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled    e There are no other virtual routers available to take master control     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     154       Boot Options Menu    Introduction  You must be logged in to the switch as the administrator to use the Boot Options Menu   The Boot Options Menu provides options for       Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset     Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset     Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP TFTP     Menu information  Command   boot     Boot Options Menu        image   Select software image to use on next boot  conf   Select config block to use on next boot  mode   Select CLI mode to use on next boot       prompt Prompt for selectable boot mode   gtimg Download new software image via FTP TFTP  ptimg Upload selected software image via FTP TF1  reset Reset switch  WARNING  Restarts Spanning 1  cur Display current boot options             Each of the Boot Options Menu commands is discussed in greater detail in the following sections     Updating the switch software image    The switch software image i
125. erate the key manually by using this command if you need  to overwrite the key for security reasons  The command will take effect  immediately without executing the apply command        skeygen    Generates the RSA server key  The switch creates this key  automatically while configuring the switch with Secure Shell  SSH   You  can generate the key manually by using this command if you need to  overwrite the key for security reasons  The command will take effect  immediately without executing the apply command        sshport  lt TCP port number gt     Sets the SSH server port number                    ena Enables the SCP apply and save    dis Disables the SCP apply and save  This is the default for SCP   on Enables the SSH server    off Disables the SSH server  This is the default for the SSH server   cur Displays the current SSH server configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     88    RADIUS server configuration    Command   cfg sys radius     RADIUS Server Menu   prisrv   Set primary RADIUS server address  secsrv Set secondary RADIUS server address  secret Set primary RADIUS server secret  secret2 Set secondary RADIUS server secret  port Set RADIUS port    retries Set RADIUS server retries   timeout Set RADIUS server timeout   telnet Enable disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet ssh http https   secbd Enable disable RADIUS secure backdoor for telnet ssh http https  on Turn RADIUS authentication ON   off Turn RADIUS authentication OFF   
126. erface Menu  Virtual Links Menu  MD5 Key Menu    Host  Route    Set the LS       Entry Menu    Redistribute Menu  DB limit for external LSA       Export default route information  Globally turn OSPF ON   Globally turn OSPF OFF   Display current OSPF configuration       The following table describes the Open Shortest Path First Menu options     Table 135 OSPF Configuration Menu options       Command  aindex  lt 0 2 gt     Description  Displays the area index menu  This area index does not represent the  actual OSPF area number        range  lt 1 16 gt     Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses        if  lt 1 255 gt     Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu        virt  lt 1 3 gt     Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual  Link        md5key  lt 1 255 gt     Displays MD5 key configuration menu        host  lt 1 128 gt     Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes  Up to 128  host routes can be configured  Host routes are used for advertising  network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server  load balancing within OSPF  It also makes Area Border Route  ABR   load sharing and ABR failover possible        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  124    Table 135 OSPF Configuration Menu options       Command  redist  lt fixed static rip gt     Description  Displays Route Distribution Menu        lsdb  lt 0 2000 gt     Sets the link state database limit  Enter 0  zero 
127. erfaces    lsa ack The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF  areas and interfaces    dbage The total number of times the data base age  Dbage  has been fired    summary The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired        ase export    The total number of times the Autonomous System Export  ASE  timer has been  fired     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     74    VRRP statistics    Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol  VRRP  support on the switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN   This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP   capable routing device     One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master  based on a number of priority criteria  and assumes control  of the shared virtual router IP address  If the master fails  one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing  authority and take control of the virtual router IP address     When virtual routers are configured  you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP       Advertisements received  vrrpInAdvers     Advertisements transmitted  vr rpOutAdvers     Advertisements received  but ignored  vrrpBadAdvers     Command   stats 13 vrrp     gt  gt  Layer 3 Statistics  vrrp  VRRP statistics   vrrpiInAdvers  vrrpBadAdvers     vrrpOutAdvers    vrrpBadVersion  vrrpBadVrid   vrrpBadAddress  vrrpBadData   vrrpBadPassword  vrrpBadInterval        The
128. ers for the ACL     ACL Group configuration    Command   cfg acl group  lt ACL number gt      ACL Group 1 Menu   add   Add ACL to group    rem   Remove ACL from group  cur   Display current ACL items in group       This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group  Once you create an ACL Group  you can  assign the ACL Group to one or more ports     The following table describes the ACL Group Configuration Menu options     Table 171 ACL Group Configuration Menu options          Command Description   add acl  lt 1 762 gt  Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group    rem acl lt 1 762 gt  Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group   cur Displays the current ACL group parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  145    Remote Monitoring configuration    Command   cfg rmon     RMON Menu     hist  event  alarm  cur    RMON  RMON       History Menu  Event Menu    RMON Alarm Menu  Display current RMON configuration       Remote Monitoring  RMON  allows you to monitor traffic flowing through the switch  The RMON MIB is described in    RFC 1757     The following table describes the RMON Configuration Menu options   Table 172 RMON Menu options    Command  hist    Description  Displays the RMON History Menu        event    Displays the RMON Event Menu        alarm    Displays the RMON Alarm Menu        cur    Displays the current RMON configuration     RMON history configuration    Command   cfg rmon hist  lt 1 65535 gt      RMON History 
129. erver  If you have a BOOTP server on the network  add the Media Access  Control  MAC  address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server  The  MAC address can be found in the System Information menu  See the    System information    section in the     Information Menu    chapter   If you are using a DHCP server that also does BOOTP  you do not have to  configure the MAC address     e Configuring manually   lf the network does not support BOOTP  you must configure the management port  with an IP address     Establishing a Telnet connection    A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network   Telnet provides the same options for user  operator  and administrator access as those available through the  console port  By default  Telnet is enabled on the switch  The switch supports four concurrent Telnet connections     Once the IP parameters are configured  you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection  To establish a Telnet  connection with the switch  run the Telnet program on the workstation and enter the telnet command  followed by  the switch IP address           telnet  lt 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch IP address gt           You will then be prompted to enter a password  The password entered determines the access level  administrator   Operator  or user  See the    Accessing the switch    section later in this chapter for description of default passwords     Establishing an SSH co
130. es in the Forwarding Database   hiwat Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database        LACP statistics    Command   stats 12 lacp  lt port number gt     Valid LACPDUs received   Valid Marker PDUs received  Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received  Unknown version TLV type    Tllegal subtype received  LACPDUs transmitted   Marker PDUs transmitted  Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted             tie ME ao JE slo JU dro E   s JOR ro do JE    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  65    Layer 3 statistics    Command   stats 13     Layer 3 Statistics Menu     GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu    geal3  ip  route  arp   dns  icmp  tcp   udp  igmp  ospf  vrrp  clrvrrp  rip  clrigmp  ipclear  dump      how I    NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW    uN  FJ  Hj    S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  O  S  G       Show RI    P stats    how route stats    RP stats  S stats  P stats  stats  stats  P stats    tats       RP stats  RRP stats  P stats       Clear IGMP stats  Clear IP stats  Dump layer 3 stats          The following table describes the Layer 3 statistics menu options     Table 55 Layer 3 statistics menu options          Command Usage   geal3 Displays the GEA statistics menu   ip IP statistics    route Displays route statistics        arp  lt clear gt     Displays Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  statistics  Add the  argument  clear  to clear ARP statistics                                dns Displays Domain Name System  DNS  statistics    icmp Displays ICMP statis
131. ess  The default value is enabled        reminders disable enable    Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI  The default  value is enabled        cur    System host log configuration  Command   cfg sys syslog     Syslog Menu   host  host2  sever  sever2    set  Set  set  Set  Set  Set    facil  facil2  console  log   cur       Displays the current system parameters     IP address of first syslog host   IP address of second syslog host   the severity of first syslog host   the severity of second syslog host   facility of first syslog host   facility of second syslog host  Enable disable console output of syslog messages    Enable disable syslogging of features  Display current syslog settings       The following table describes the Syslog Configuration Menu options     Table 80 Syslog Configuration Menu options       Command Description   host  lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address of the first syslog host  For example   100 10 1 1   host2  lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address of the second syslog host  For  example   100 10 1 2       sever  lt 1 7 gt     Sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed   The default is 7  which means log all the severity levels        sever2  lt 1 7 gt     Sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed   The default is 7  which means log all the severity levels        facil  lt 1 7 gt     This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host  displayed  The range is 0 7  The default is 0        facil2 
132. essages received           icmpInEchoReps    The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received        icmpInTimestamps    The number of ICMP Timestamp  request  messages received           icmpInTimestampReps    The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received        icmpInAddrMasks    The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received        icmpInAddrMaskReps    The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received        icmpOutMsgs    The total number of ICMP messages which this switch attempted to send  Note  that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors           icmpOutErrors    The number of ICMP messages that this switch did not send due to problems  discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer  This value should not include  errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the  resultant datagram  In some implementations there may be no types of errors  that contribute to this counter s value        icmpOutDestUnreachs    The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent        icmpOutTimeExcds    The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent           icmpOutParmProbs    The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent        icmpOutSrcQuenchs    The number of ICMP Source Quench  buffer almost full  stop sending data   messages sent                 icmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent   icmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo  request  messages sent   icmpOutEchoReps The number 
133. et your communication software on your workstation to  capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  29    FDB information menu  Command   info 12 fdb   Forwarding Database Menu     find   Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  port Show FDB entries on a single port    vian Show FDB entries on a single VLAN  state Show FDB entries by state  dump Show all FDB entries       The forwarding database  FDB  contains information that maps the media access control  MAC  address of each  known device to the switch port where the device address was learned  The FDB also shows which other ports  have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address     NOTE  The master forwarding database supports up to 8K MAC address entries on the management  processor  MP  per switch     Table 19 FDB information menu       Command Usage   find  lt MAC address gt    lt VLAN gt   Displays a single database entry by its MAC address  You are  prompted to enter the MAC address of the device   Enter the MAC address using the format  xx xx xx Xx xx xx   For  example  08 00 20 12 34 56   You can also enter the MAC address using the format  xxxxxXXXXXxx    For example  080020123456                 port  lt port number gt  Displays all FDB entries for a particular port    vlan  lt 1 4095 gt  Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN  The range is 1 4095   state unknown ignore   Displays all FDB entries that match a particular sta
134. eter configuration menu   re mark Displays the ACL re mark configuration menu   pktfmt Displays the ACL Packet Format configuration menu        egrport  lt port number gt     Configures the ACL to function on egress packets   The egress port ACL will not match a Layer 2 broadcast or multicast packet   The egress port ACL will not match packets if the destination port is a trunk        action  permit deny setprio  lt 0 7 gt     Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions  You can  choose to permit  pass  or deny  drop  packets  or set the 802 1p priority for the  packets              stats eld Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List  The  default is disabled    reset Resets the ACL parameters to their default values and removes the ACL from  all ports to which it is assigned    cur Displays the current ACL parameters     NOTE  ACL number is available from 1 to 762  ACLs are divided into Precedence Groups  Each Precedence  Group provides a different set of packet classifiers for the ACLs within the Precedence Group  See the   Quality of Service  chapter in the Application Guide     ACL Ethernet Filter configuration    Command   cfg acl acl  lt ACL number gt  ethernet       Ethernet  set  Set  set  set  set     Filtering  smac  dmac  vian  etype  pri  reset  cur    Menu     to  to  to  to  to    filter  filter  filter    source MAC  destination MAC  on VLAN ID   on ethernet typ   on priority    on  on    filter  filter 
135. f The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First   OSPF     broadcast Indicates a broadcast address    martian The address belongs to a filtered group     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     41    ARP information    Command   info arp     Address Resolution Protocol Menu   find   Show a single ARP entry by IP address  port Show ARP entries on a single port    vian Show ARP entries on a single VLAN  addr Show ARP entries for switch s interface  dump Show all ARP entries       The Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry  address  status flags  VLAN  and port for the address  and port referencing information     The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol Menu options     Table 30 ARP information                   Command Usage   find  lt IP address gt  Displays a single ARP entry by IP address  For example  192 4 17 101   port  lt port number gt  Displays the ARP entries on a single port    vlan  lt 1 4095 gt  Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN    addr Displays the ARP address list  IP address  IP mask  MAC address  and VLAN  flags    dump Displays all ARP entries  including     e  P address and MAC address of each entry   e Address status flag   e The VLAN and port to which the address belongs   The ports which have referenced the address  empty if no port has routed traffic  to the IP address shown        ARP address list information    Command   info arp add
136. for which the value of the error status field is read only   It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU  which  contains the value read only in the error status field  As such  this object is provided  as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP           snmpInGenErrs    The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which were delivered to the  SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is genErr        snmpInTotalReqVars    The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP  protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get Request and Get Next  Protocol Data Units  PDUs            snmpInTotalSetVars    The total number of MIB objects  which have been altered successfully by the SNMP  protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units   PDUs         snmpInGetRequests    The total number of SNMP Get Request Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have  been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity        snmpInGetNexts    The total number of SNMP Get Next Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have been  accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity        snmpInSetRequests    The total number of SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have  been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity           snmpInGetResponses    The total number of SNMP Get Response Protocol Data Units  PDUs   which have  been a
137. ge        Hello    The hello time parameter specifies  in seconds  how often the root bridge transmits a  configurationbridge protocol data unit  BPDU   Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses  the root bridge hello value           axAge    The maximum age parameter specifies  in seconds  the maximum time the bridge waits  without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP  network        FwdDel    The forward delay parameter specifies  in seconds  the amount of time that a bridge port  has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state        Aging    The aging time parameter specifies  in seconds  the amount of time the bridge waits without  receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding  Database        Priority  port     The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated  port  In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment   the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment        Cost    The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment   Generally speaking  the faster the port  the lower the path cost  A setting of zero  0   indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been  auto negotiated        State    Shows the current state of the port  The State field in RSTP MSTP mode can be one of t
138. gin notice   Set login banner   Enable disable display hostname  sysName  in CLI prompt  Enable disable use of BOOTP   Enable disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface  Enable disable Reminders          Display current system wide parameters       4  Enter the following command to set the administrator password        System access user  admpw    5  Enter the current administrator password at the prompt     Changing ADMINISTRATOR password  validation required          NOTE  You must not forget your  your service representative        Enter current administrator password     administrator password  If you forget your administrator password  contact    6  Enter the new administrator password at the prompt        Enter new administrator password     7  Enter the new administrator password  again  at the prompt     Re enter new administrator password     8  Apply and save the change by entering the following commands     System  apply    System  save       Changing the default user password    The user login has limited control of the switch  Through a user account  you can view switch information and  statistics  but you cannot make configuration changes     The default password for the user account is user  This password cannot be changed from the user account  Only    the administrator has the ability to    change passwords  as shown in the following procedure     1  Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password     2    From the Main Menu  use the following command to
139. groups     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  47    IGMP multicast router port information  Command   info 13 igmp mrouter     IGMP Multicast Router Menu     vlan   Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan  dump   Show all multicast router ports       The following table describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers learned through  IGMP Snooping     Table 36 IGMP Multicast Router menu options       Command Usage  vlan  lt 1 4094 gt  Displays information for all multicast groups on a single VLAN   dump Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch     VRRP information    Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol  VRRP  support on the switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN   This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP   capable routing device  One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master  based on a number of priority  criteria  and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address  If the master fails  one of the backup virtual  routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address     Command   info vrrp    VRRP information   kes vrid 2  205 178 138 210  4 renter  prio 100  master  server    2  vrid 1  205 178 18 202  renter  prio 100  backup  33  VELO  3  205 078 138 204  renter  prio 100  master  proxy       When virtual routers are configured  you can view the
140. gt  Adds a single ARP entry to switch memory    lt VLAN number gt   lt port number gt    del  lt IP address gt  Removes a single ARP entry from switch memory   clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory   cur Displays the current ARP configurations     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  119    IP Forwarding configuration    Command   cfg 13 frwd     IP Forwarding Menu   Enable disable forwarding directed broadcasts  Globally turn IP Forwarding ON    dirbr    on    off    cur      Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF  Display current IP Forwarding configuration          The following table describes the IP Forwarding Configuration Menu options     Table 128 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu options    Command  dirbr disable enable    Description    Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts  This command is  disabled by default              on Enables IP forwarding  routing  on the switch    off Disables IP forwarding  routing  on the switch  Forwarding is turned off  by default    cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings     Network Filter configuration    Command   cfg 13 nwf  lt 1 256 gt      IP Network Filter 1 Menu     addr     mask      enable  disable  delet    IP Address   IP Subnet mask   Enable Network Filter  Disable Network Filter  Delete Network Filter       current          Display current Network Filter configuration    The following table describes the Network Filter Configuration Menu options     Table 129 Netwo
141. guration Menu    qos Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu   acl Displays the Access Control List Configuration Menu   rmon Displays the RMON Configuration Menu    pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu    ufd Displays the Uplink Failure Detection Configuration Menu   dump Dumps current configuration to a script file    ptcfg  lt host name or IP address of Backs up current configuration to FTP TFTP server   FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename on host gt    gtcfg  lt host name or IP address of Restores current configuration from FTP TFTP server   FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename on host gt    cur Displays the current configuration parameters     Viewing  applying  reverting  and saving changes    As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters  the changes you make do not take effect  immediately  All changes are considered pending until you explicitly apply them  Also  any changes are lost the next  time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved     While configuration changes are in the pending state  you can       View the pending changes     Apply the pending changes     Revert to restore configuration parameters set with the last apply command    Save the changes to flash memory    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  83    Viewing pending changes    You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at any CLI prompt       diff    You can view all pending configuration changes that ha
142. guration changes    opw  lt 1 128 characters gt  Sets the operator  oper  password  maximum 128 characters   The operator  manages all functions of the switch  He or she can view all switch information and  statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch    admpw  lt 1 128 Sets the administrator  admin  password  maximum 128 characters   The super   characters gt  user administrator has complete access to all menus  information  and  configuration commands on the switch  including the ability to change both the user  and administrator passwords    cur Displays the current user status              User ID configuration    Command   cfg sys access user uid  lt uid number gt      User ID 1 Menu   cos   Set class of service  name Set user name  pswd Set user password    ena Enable user ID  dis Disable user ID  del Delete user ID  cur Display current user configuration          The following table describes the User ID Configuration menu options     Table 98 User ID Configuration menu options                      Command Description   cos Sets the Class of Service to define the user   s authority level    lt user oper admin gt    name  lt 1 8 Defines the user name    characters gt    pswd  lt 1 128 Sets the user password of up to 128 characters maximum   characters gt    ena Enables the user ID    dis Disables the user ID    del Deletes the user ID    cur Displays the current user ID parameters     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  100    HTTPS 
143. he  following  Discarding  DISC   Learning  LRN   Forwarding  FWD   or  Disabled  DSB         Role    Shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree  The port role can be one of the  following  Designated  DESG   Root  ROOT   Alternate  ALTN   Backup  BKUP   Master   MAST   or Unknown  UNK         Designated bridge    Shows information about the bridge connected to each port  if applicable  Information  includes the priority  hex  and MAC address of the Designated Bridge        Designated port    The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected        Type    Type of link connected to the port  and whether the port is an edge port  Link type values  are AUTO  P2P  or SHARED   MSTP  The Type field appears in  info cist     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     36    Common Internal Spanning Tree information  Command   info 12 cist    Mstp Digest  0xac36177  50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62  Common Internal Spanning Tree   VLANs  1 3 4094    Current Root  Path Cost Port MaxAge FwdDel  8000 00 03 42  fa 3b  80 11 I 20 15    CIST Regional Root  Path Cost  8000 00 03 42  fa 3b 80 11    Parameters  Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops  32768 20 15 20    Port Prio Cost Stat Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type       ESG 8000 00 03 42 fa 3b 80 8001  ESG 8000 00 03 42 fa 3b 80 8002          Oo0000000Oo  DOr Or OO  OOO     ESG 8000 00 03 42 fa 3b 80          NNONNNNNNNN O  ah                  La     lt  gt   oo       In addition 
144. he default is 20 seconds   This command does not apply to MSTP  See the    Common Internal Spanning Tree  configuration    section for more information    fwd  lt 4 30 gt  Configures the bridge forward delay parameter  The forward delay parameter specifies the  amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the  learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state  The range is 4 to 30  seconds  and the default is 15 seconds   This command does not apply to MSTP  See the    Common Internal Spanning Tree  configuration    section for more information    cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters                 When configuring STP bridge parameters  the following formulas must be used       2  fwd 1   gt  mxage    2  hello 1   lt  mxage    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  111    Spanning Tree port configuration    Command   cfg 12 stp  lt STG number gt  port  lt port number gt      Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu   prior   Set port Priority  0 255   cost   Set port Path Cost  1 65535  802 1d     1 200000000  MSTP RSTP  0 for auto   link Set port link type  auto  p2p  or shared  default  auto     edge Enables or disables this port as an edge port    fastfwd Enable disable Port Fast Forwarding mode   on Turn port s Spanning Tree ON   off Turn port s Spanning Tree OFF   cur Display current port Spanning Tree parameters                By default for STP PVST   Spanning tree is turned Off for
145. he default value is disabled  This  command does not apply when backdoor  telnet  is enabled                    on Enables the RADIUS server   off Disables the RADIUS server  This is the default   cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters     IMPORTANT  If RADIUS is enabled  you must login using RADIUS authentication when connecting via the  console or Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS  Backdoor for console is always enabled  so you can connect using  noradius and the administrator password even if the backdoor  telnet  or secure backdoor  secbd  are  disabled     If Telnet backdoor is enabled  telnet ena   type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking   and use the administrator password to log into the switch  The switch allows this even if RADIUS servers are  available     If secure backdoor is enabled  secbd ena   type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking   and use the administrator password to log into the switch  The switch allows this only if RADIUS servers are  not available     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  89    TACACS  server configuration    Command   cfg sys tacacs      TACACS  Server Menu       Set  Set    prisrv  secsrv    IP address  IP address       Set  Set    secret  secret2    secret for  secret for       of primary TACACS  server  of secondary TACACS  server  primary TACACS  server  secondary TACACS  server    Set  Set    port   retries  timeout Set  telnet Enable disable    TACACS  port number   n
146. he matched route        type 1 2 none    Assigns the type of OSPF metric    e Type 1   External routes are calculated using both internal and  external metrics    e Type 2   External routes are calculated using only the external  metrics  Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2    e   none   Removes the OSPF metric        prec  lt 1 255 gt     Sets the precedence of the route map  The smaller the value  the higher  the precedence  Default value is 10                 enable Enables the route map    disable Disables the route map    delete Deletes the route map    current Displays the current route configuration     IP Access List configuration    Command   cfg 13 rmap  lt 1 32 gt  alist  lt 1 8 gt      IP Access List 1 Menu   nwf   Network  metric   Metric  action   Set Network Filter action    Filter number    enable Enable Access List  disable Disable Access List  delet Delete Access List                current Display    current Access List configuration    The route map number  1 32  and the access list number  1 8  represent the IP access list you wish to configure   The following table describes the IP Access List Configuration Menu options     Table 131 IP Access List Configuration Menu options       Command  nwf  lt 1 256 gt     Description  Sets the network filter number        metric  lt 1 16777214 gt  none    Sets the metric value in the AS External  ASE  LSA        action permit deny    Permits or denies action for the access list                 enable Enables th
147. hts in terms of  a particular MIB view for security reasons     The following table describes the SNMPv3 View Table information     Table 10 SNMPv3 View Table parameters             Field Description   View Name Displays the name of the view    Subtree Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string  A view subtree is the set of all MIB object  instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names    Mask Displays the bit mask    Type Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view     SNMPv3 Access Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 access       Group Nam Model WriteV NotifyV    vlv2grp snmpvl noAuthNoPriv iso viv2only  admingrp usm authPriv iso iso       The access control sub system provides authorization services     The vacmAccessTable maps a group name  security information  a context  and a message type  which could be  the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view     The View based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access  rights of a group  This group   s access rights are determined by a read view  a write view  and a notify view  The  read view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects  The write view  represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects  The notify view represents the  set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a not
148. icant  Indicates that the Authenticator chose an  EAP method           backendNonNakResponsesFrom Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from   Supplicant the Supplicant to an initial EAP Request  and the response is something  other than EAP NAK  Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the  Authenticators chosen EAP method    backendAuthSuccesses Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept    message from the Authentication Server  Indicates that the Supplicant  has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server        bac    kendAuthFails    Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message  from the Authentication Server  Indicates that the Supplicant has not  authenticated to the Authentication Server        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     58    Bridging statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  brg    Bridging statistics for port 1     dot1lPortInFrames   dot1PortOutFrames   dot1PortInDiscards        63242584  63277826    dotlTplLearnedEntryDiscards   dot1StpPortForwardTransitions        The following table describes the bridging statistics for a selected port     Table 47 Bridging statistics for port  Statistics  dot1lPortInFrames    Description   The number of frames that have been received by this port from its  segment    A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is counted by  this object  if and only if  it is for a p
149. ics Menu     Configuration Menu     Operations Command Menu    Boot Options Menu     Maintenance Menu      Show pending config changes  global command      Apply pending config changes  global command      Save updated config to FLASH  global command      Revert pending or applied changes  global command     Exit  global command  always available              Idle timeout    By default  the switch will disconnect the console  Telnet  or SSH session after five minutes of inactivity  This  function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter  which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes  For information on  changing this parameter  see the    System configuration    section in the    Configuration Menu    chapter     Typographical conventions    The following table describes the typographic styles used in this guide     Table 3 Typographic conventions          Typeface or symbol Meaning Example  AaBbCc123 This type depicts onscreen computer output and Main   prompts   AaBbCc123 This type displays in command examples and Main  sys  shows text that must be typed in exactly as  shown    lt AaBbCc123 gt  This italicized type displays in command examples To establish a Telnet session  enter     as a parameter placeholder  Replace the indicated  text with the appropriate real name or value when  using the command  Do not type the brackets   This also shows guide titles  special terms  or  words to be emphasized     host  telnet  lt IP address gt     Read the user guide thoroughly        Com
150. ification     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  23    The following table describes the SNMPv3 Access Table information     Table 11 SNMPv3 Access Table parameters                   Field Description   Group Name Displays the name of group    Model Displays the security model used  for example  SNMPv1  or SNMPv2 or USM    Level Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access  For example   noAuthNoPriv  authNoPriv  or auth Priv    Readv Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access    Writev Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access    NotifyV Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access     SNMPv3 Group Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 group       Group Name    viv2only  adminmd5 admingrp  adminsha admingrp       A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the  security names belonging to that group  The group is identified by a group name     The following table describes the SNMPv3 Group Table information   Table 12 SNMPv3 Group Table parameters          Field Description   Sec Model Displays the security model used  which is any one of  USM  SNMPv1  SNMPv2  and SNMPv3   User Name Displays the name for the user    Group Name Displays the access name of the group     SNMPv3 Community Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 comm    public viv2only viv2trap 
151. iguration Menu options     Table 107 Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options          Command Description   cist Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree  CIST  Menu    name  lt 1 32 characters gt  Configures a name for the MSTP region  All devices within a MSTP region  must have the same region name    rev  lt 0 65535 gt  Configures the revision level for the MSTP region  The revision level is used as    a numerical identifier for the region  All devices within a MSTP region must  have the same revision level number  The range is 0 65535              maxhop  lt 4 60 gt  Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may to traverse  before it is dropped  The range is from 4 to 60 hops  The default is 20    mode rstp mstp Selects either Rapid Spanning Tree mode  rstp  or Multiple Spanning Tree  mode  mstp   The default mode is RSTP    on Globally turn RSTP MSTP ON     Note  When RSTP is turned on  the configuration parameters for STP group 1  apply to RSTP          off Globally turn RSTP MSTP OFF  This is the default   cur Displays the current RSTP MSTP configuration   NOTE     e IEEE 802 1w standard based RSTP implementation runs on one STG  i e  same as one spanning tree  instance  only  As a result  if    rstp    mode is selected under the  cfg mrst  mode command  then only a  single RSTP instance  default for STG 1  is supported for all VLANs  including the Default VLAN 1    e  f multiple spanning tree instances are required  then select    mstp    mode
152. iguration Menu options   Table 146 IGMP Filtering Menu                Command Description   filter  lt 1 16 gt  Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu    port  lt port number gt  Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu    ena Enables IGMP filtering globally    dis Disables IGMP Filtering globally  This is the default   cur Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters     IGMP filter definition    Command   cfg 13 igmp igmpf1t filter    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  131     IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu   range   Set IP Multicast address range  action   Set filter action  ena   Enable filter    dis   Disable filter  del   Delete filter  cur   Display current IGMP filter configuration             The following table describes the IGMP Filter Definition Menu options   Table 147 IGMP Filter Definition Menu                   Command Description   range  lt IP multicast address gt   lt IP Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter  Enter   multicast address gt  the first IP multicast address of the ranger  followed by the second  IP multicast address of the range    action allow deny Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses  specified    ena Enables this IGMP filter    dis Disables this IGMP filter  This is the default    del Deletes this filter   s parameter definitions    cur Displays the current IGMP filter     IGMP filtering port configuration    Command   cfg 13 igmp igmpflt port     IGMP Port 1
153. ilable from the Statistics Menu  40K or more  depending  on your configuration   This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance     If you want to capture dump data to a file  set your communication software on your workstation to capture session  data prior to issuing the dump commands     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  82       Configuration Menu    Introduction    The Configuration Menu is only available from an administrator login  It includes submenus for configuring every  aspect of the switch  Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied  Changes can be saved to non   volatile memory  NVRAM      Menu information    Command   cfg     Configuration Menu   sys   System wide Parameter Menu  port Port Menu  12 Layer 2 Menu  1 3 Layer 3 Menu  qos QOS Menu  acl Access Control List Menu       rmon RMON Menu   pmirr Port Mirroring Menu   ufd Uplink Failure Detection Menu   dump Dump current configuration to script file   ptcfg Backup current configuration to FTP TFTP server  gtcfg Restore current configuration from FTP TFTP server  cur Display current configuration             The following table describes the Configuration Menu options     Table 78 Configuration Menu options                                        Command Usage   sys Displays the System Configuration Menu    port  lt port number gt  Displays the Port Configuration Menu    12 Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu    13 Displays the Layer 3 Confi
154. inders  cur       Set system timezon   Set system DST for US   Set system daylight savings   Set timeout for idle CLI sessions   Set login notice   Set login banner   Enable disable display hostname  sysName  in CLI prompt  Enable disable use of BOOTP   Enable disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface  Enable disable Reminders   Display current system wide parameters          This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode  passwords  browser based management settings  and management access list     The following table describes the System Configuration Menu options     Table 79 System Configuration Menu options                               Command Usage   syslog Displays the Syslog Menu    sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu    radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu    tacacs  Displays the TACACS  AuthenticationMenu    ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol  NTP  Server Menu   ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu    access Displays the System Access Menu    date Prompts the user for the system date    time Configures the system time using a 24 hour clock format   timezone Configures the time zone where the switch resides  You are    prompted to select your location  continent  country  region  by the  timezone wizard  Once a region is selected  the switch updates the  time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time  etc        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  85    Table 
155. information  see the    Setting passwords     section in the    First time configuration    chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  10    Table 2 User access levels       User account Description and tasks performed   User The user has no direct responsibility for switch management  He or she can view all  switch status information and statistics  but cannot make any configuration changes to  the switch  The user account is enabled by default  and the default password is user           Oper The operator manages all functions of the switch  The operator can reset ports or the  entire switch  By default  the operator account is disabled and has no password   Admin The super user administrator has complete access to all menus  information  and    configuration commands on the switch  including the ability to change both the user  and administrator passwords  The admin account is enabled by default  and the  default password is admin     NOTE  With the exception of the admin user  setting the password to an empty value can disable access to    each user level     Once you enter the administrator password and it is verified  you are given complete access to the switch     After logging in  the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed  See the    Menu basics    chapter for a summary of the Main    Menu options         Main Menu   info  Stats  cfg  oper  boot  maint  diff  apply  save  revert  exit        gt  gt  Main       Information Menu     Statist
156. ing Tree Configuration Menu options    Command  Brg    Description  Displays the CIST Bridge Menu        port  lt port number gt     Displays the CIST Port Menu        Add  lt 1 4095 gt     Adds VLANs to the CIST  Enter one VLAN per line  and press Enter to add the VLANs        default    Resets all CIST parameters to their default values        Cur    CIST bridge configuration    Command   cfg 12 mrst cist brg    Displays the current CIST configuration      CIST Bridge Menu     prior    mxage  fwd  cur    Set CIST bridge Priority  0 65535    Set CIST bridge Max Age  6 40 secs    Set CIST bridge Forward Delay  4 30 secs   Display current CIST bridge parameters          CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP mode  CIST parameters do not affect operation    of STP PVST      The following table describes the commands used to configure CIST Bridge Configuration Menu options    parameters     Table 109 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu options    Command  prior  lt 0 65535 gt     Description   Configures the CIST bridge priority  The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge  on the network is the MSTP root bridge    To make this switch the root bridge  configure the bridge priority lower than all other  switches and bridges on your network  The lower the value  the higher the bridge priority   The range is 0 to 65535  and the default is 32768    This command does not apply to RSTP  See the  Bridge Spanning Tree configuration   section for more informat
157. ink status   Show port information       geaport Show system port and gea port mapping    sfp  ufd  dump    Show External Port SFP XFP Status  Show Uplink Failure Detection information  Dump all information          The following table describes the Information Menu options     Table 6 Information Menu options    Command  sys    Usage  Displays system information        12    Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu        r3    Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu        qos    Displays the Quality of Service  QoS  Information Menu        acl    Displays the Access Control List Information Menu        rmon    Displays the Remote Monitoring Information Menu        link    Displays configuration information about each port  including   Port number   Port speed  10 Mb s  100 Mb s  1000 Mb s  or any   Duplex mode  half  full  or any    Flow control for transmit and receive  no  yes  or any   Link status  up or down        port    Displays port status information  including    Port number   Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not  Port VLAN ID  PVID    Port name   VLAN membership       geaport    Displays GEA port mapping information  used by service personnel        sfp    Displays SFP module information        ufd    Displays Uplink Failure Detection information       dump    Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu  10K or more  depending on  your configuration     If you want to capture dump data to a file  set your communication software on your works
158. ion        mxage  lt 6 40 gt     Configures the CIST bridge maximum age  The maximum age parameter specifies the  maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit  before it reconfigures the MSTP network  The range is 6 to 40 seconds  and the default  is 20 seconds    This command does not apply to RSTP  See the  Bridge Spanning Tree configuration   section for more information        fwd  lt 4 30 gt     Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter  The forward delay parameter  specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the  listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state   The range is 4 to 30 seconds  and the default is 15 seconds    This command does not apply to RSTP  See the  Bridge Spanning Tree configuration   section for more information        cur    Displays the current CIST bridge configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  108    CIST port configuration    Command   cfg 12 mrst cist port  lt port number gt      CIST Port Menu     prior Set port Priority  0 240   cost Set port Path Cost  1 200000000  O for auto   hello Set CIST port Hello Time  1 10 secs     link Set MSTP link type  auto  p2p  or shared  default  auto   edge Enables or disables edge port   on Turn port s Spanning Tree ON   off Turn port s Spanning Tree OFF   cur Display current port Spanning Tree parameters                CIST port 
159. iption   ipRoutesCur The total number of outstanding routes in the route table   ipRoutesMax The maximum number of supported routes   ipRoutesHighWater The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table        ARP statistics    Command   stats 13 arp    ARP statistics        triesCur  EntriesHighWater           The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  statistics   Table 59 ARP statistics       I _          _        gt EE _        lt  gt  gt   gt  _            _    uaQ_Q    _uuu   _     _ zoPv_Q5__ _ o   _ o _                       _z___Q__ e     eo             uT  Q e  Statistic Description  arpEntriesCur The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table   arpEntriesHighWater The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table        DNS statistics    Command   stats 13 dns    DNS statistics   dnsInRequests  O dnsOutRequests     dnsBadRequests  0       The following table describes the Domain Name System  DNS  statistics   Table 60 DNS statistics          Statistic Description   dnsInRequests The total number of DNS request packets that have been received   dnsOutRequests The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted   dnsBadRequests The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  68    ICMP statistics    Command   stats 13 icmp    ICMP statistics    icmpInMsgs  245802 icmpInErrors   icmpInDestUnreachs  41
160. is enabled by default     1     2     3     Use the following command to enable SNMP      gt  gt     cfg sys access snmp disable read only read write    Set SNMP read or write community string  By default  they are public and private respectively      gt  gt     cfg sys ssnmp rcomm wcomm    When prompted  enter the proper community string     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     16    4  Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support  Otherwise apply and  save after the performing the    Optional Setup for Telnet Support    steps      gt  gt  System  apply        gt  gt  System  save    Setting passwords    NEC recommends that you change all passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under the  network security policies  See the    Accessing the switch    section in the    Command line interface    chapter for a  description of the user access levels     To change the user  operator  or administrator password  you must log in using the administrator password   Passwords cannot be modified from the user or operator command mode     NOTE  You must not forget your administrator password  If you forget your administrator password  contact  your service representative     Changing the default administrator password    The administrator has complete access to all menus  information  and configuration commands  including the ability  to change the user  operator  and administrator passwor
161. is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu     Criteria are tracked dynamically  continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled  If the virtual  router preemption option is enabled  this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level  rises above that of the current master     Some tracking criteria  vrs  ifs  and ports below  apply to standard virtual routers  otherwise called    virtual  interface routers     A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address  addr  is the same as  any configured virtual server IP address     The following table describes the Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options     Table 153 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options  Command Description    vrs disablelenable When enabled  the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual  router in master mode on this switch  This is useful for making sure that traffic for  any particular client server pairing are handled by the same switch  increasing  routing and load balancing efficiency  This command is disabled by default    ifs disable enable When enabled  the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP  interface active on this switch  An IP interface is considered active when there is  at least one active port on the same VLAN  This helps elect the virtual routers with  the most available routes as the master  This comman
162. itch  Users  may display information that has no security or privacy implications  such as switch statistics and current  operational state information       Operator   Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch  These changes will be lost when the  switch is rebooted reset  Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch  operations  Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch  operators cannot  severely impact switch operation  but do have access to the Maintenance menu       Administrator   Only administrators can make permanent changes to the switch configuration  changes that  are persistent across a reboot reset of the switch  Administrators can access switch functions to configure and  troubleshoot problems on the switch  Because administrators can also make temporary  operator level   changes as well  they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes     Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique usernames and passwords  Once you are  connected to the switch via the local console  Telnet  or SSH  you are prompted to enter a password  The password  entered determines the access level  The default user names password for each access level is listed in the  following table     NOTE  Itis recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as    regularly as required under your network security policies  For more 
163. lays the current OSPF configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  126    OSPF Summary Range configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf range  lt 1 16 gt      OSPF Summary  addr    Range 1 Menu     Set IP address    set  set    mask    aindex    hide      enable  disable    delet Del    IP mask  area index    Enable disable hide range  Enable range  Disable range          cur    te rang    Display current OSPF summary range configuration       The following table describes the OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu options     Table 137 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu options       Command  addr  lt IP Address gt     Description  Configures the base IP address for the range  For example   100 10 1 1       mask  lt IP address mask gt     Configures the IP address mask for the range        aindex  lt 0 2 gt     Configures the area index used by the switch  The default is 0        hide disable enable    Hides the OSPF summary range  The default is disabled                 enable Enables the OSPF summary range    disable Disables the OSPF summary range  This is the default   delete Deletes the OSPF summary range    cur Displays the current OSPF summary range     OSPF Interface configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf if  lt 1 255 gt      OSPF Interface 1  aindex   Set    Menu     area index       prio Set  cost set  hello Set  dead Set  trans Set  Set  Set  Set    retra  key  mdke y  enable  disable    interface router priority  interface cos
164. lied changes  global command   exit   Exit  global command  always available           Menu summary    The Main Menu displays the following submenus     Information Menu    The Information Menu provides submenus for displaying information about the current status of the switch   from basic system settings to VLANs  and more     Statistics Menu    This menu provides submenus for displaying switch performance statistics  Included are port  IP  ICMP  TCP   UDP  SNMP  routing  ARP  and DNS     Configuration Menu    This menu is available only from an administrator login  It includes submenus for configuring every aspect of  the switch  Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied  Changes can be saved to non   volatile memory  NVRAM     Operations Command Menu   Operations level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration   This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service  This menu is available only from an  administrator and operator login    Boot Options Menu   The Boot Options Menu is available only from an administrator login  This menu is used for upgrading switch  software  selecting configuration blocks  and for resetting the switch when necessary  This menu is also used  to set the switch back to factory settings    Maintenance Menu   This menu is used for debugging purposes  enabling you to generate a technical support dump of the critical  state information in the switch  and to clear en
165. lling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed    Last value Displays the last sampled value    OID Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  51    RMON event information    Command   info rmon event       Type  both  none   log  trap  both  both  both  both  both    CO  WD  AC O DA O O SSD Ga  OU OU UO OU UO OU OU OU OD          D O O O On ee eer              Last Sent    O O E  gt  S e D O O DO OA             Event group configuration           Event_100    Des    Log and trap  Log and trap  Send log and  Send log and    cription    event for    event for    Link       Link    trap for icmpln    Down  Up  sg       trap for icmpInEchos    The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters     Table 43 RMON Event Information Menu  info rmon event          Command Usage  Index Displays the index number that identifies each event instance   Type Displays the type of notification provided for this event  as follows  none  log  trap  both        Last Sent    Displays the time that passed since the last switch reboot  when the most recent event was  triggered  This value is cleared when the switch reboots           Description    Displays a text description of the event     Link status information    Command   info link    POE       Phy Type       ANAANDAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA    HWA A A A A A A PRP Pee eePee ee    Speed          OO   M 0 22 10 00 0 000
166. lo packet  which is set to be in  an interval of seconds  The default value is 10 seconds    dead  lt 1 65535 gt  Configures the health parameters of a hello packet  which is set to be in an  interval of seconds  Default is 60 seconds    trans  lt 1 3600 gt  Configures the delay in transit in seconds  Default is one second    retra  lt 1 3600 gt  Configures the retransmit interval in seconds  Default is five seconds    nbr  lt IP address gt  Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor  Default is 0 0 0 0   key  lt password gt  Configures the password  up to eight characters  for each virtual link  Default is  none    mdkey  lt 1 255 gt  none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link  Default is none    enable Enables OSPF virtual link    disable Disables OSPF virtual link  This is the default    delete Deletes OSPF virtual link    cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings     OSPF Host Entry configuration  Command   cfg 13 ospf host  lt 1 128 gt      OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu   addr   Set host entry IP address  aindex Set area index  cost Set cost of this host entry       enable Enable host entry   disable Disable host entry   delet Delete host entry   cur Display current OSPF host entry configuration             The following table describes the OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu options     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  128    Table 140 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu options                         Command Description   addr  
167. lt IP address gt  Configures the base IP address for the host entry  For example   100 10 1 1   aindex  lt 0 2 gt  Configures lays the area index of the host  The default is 0    cost  lt 1 65535 gt  Configures the cost value of the host  The default value is 1    enable Enables OSPF host entry    disable Disables OSPF host entry  This is the default    delete Deletes OSPF host entry    cur Displays the current OSPF host entries     OSPF Route Redistribution configuration    Command   cfg 13 ospf redist fixed static rip     OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu   add   Add rmap into route redistribution list    rem   Remove rmap from route redistribution list  export   Export all routes of this protocol  cur   Display current route maps added          The following table describes the OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu options     Table 141 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu options       Command Description   add  lt 1 32 gt   lt 1 32 gt  all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list  To add all the 32 route maps  enter a11   To add specific route maps  enter routing map numbers one per line  NULL at the  end   This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list  The routes of the  redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be             redistributed    rem  lt 1 32 gt   lt 1 32 gt      Removes the route map from the route redistribution list    lal1 Removes routing maps from the rmap list  To remove all 3
168. mand items shown inside brackets are  optional and can be used or excluded as the  situation demands  Do not type the brackets     host  ls   a     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  11       Menu basics    Introduction    The AOS CLI is used for viewing switch information and statistics  In addition  the administrator can use the CLI for  performing all levels of switch configuration     To make the CLI easy to use  the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and  submenus  Each menu displays a list of commands and or submenus that are available  along with a summary of  what each command will do  Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the  current menu     This chapter describes the Main Menu commands  and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are  commonly available from all the menus within the CLI     Main Menu    The Main Menu displays after a successful connection and login  The following table shows the Main Menu for the  administrator login  Some features are not available under the user login               Main Menu   info   Information Menu  stats   Statistics Menu  cfg   Configuration Menu  oper   Operations Command Menu  boot   Boot Options Menu  maint   Maintenance Menu  diff   Show pending config changes  global command   apply   Apply pending config changes  global command   save   Save updated config to FLASH  global command   revert   Revert pending or app
169. mation   1  47 80 23 243 255 255 254 0 47 80723255  vlan 1  up    Default gateway information  metric strict  Tes Ae BO 221g up  23 47480  622542  up    Current BOOTP relay settings  OFF  0 0 0 0  0 0 0 0    Current IP forwarding settings  OFF  dirbr disabled    Current network filter settings     none    Current route map settings        The following interface and default gateway information is displayed     Interface number   IP address   IP mask   IP broadcast address  Operational status  Bootp relay settings  Network filter settings  Route map settings    IGMP multicast group information    Command   info 13 igmp     IGMP Multicast Group Menu   mrouter Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information  find Show a single group by IP group address    vian Show groups on a single vlan  port Show groups on a single port  trunk Show groups on a single trunk  dump Show all groups       The following table describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned by the switch     Table 35 IGMP Multicast Group menu options                   Command Usage   mrouter Displays the Multicast Router Menu    find  lt IP address gt  Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address   vlan  lt 1 4094 gt  Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN   port  lt port number gt  Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port   trunk  lt 1 40 gt  Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group   dump Displays information for all multicast 
170. menu option is disabled except VLAN 1 and 4095  which is always enabled  This switch  supports a maximum of 1 000 VLANs  VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management interface     NOTE  See the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide for information on VLANs     The following table describes the VLAN Configuration Menu options     Table 121 VLAN Configuration Menu options       Command Description   name  lt 1 32 characters gt  Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name  The default  VLAN name is the first one    stg  lt 0 128 gt  Assigns a VLAN to a spanning tree group  STG number is assigned    STGs 1 128 for STP PVST   only STG 1 for RSTP  and STGs 0 32 for  MSTP  STG 0 is CIST                           add  lt port number gt  Adds ports to the VLAN membership    rem  lt port number gt  Removes ports from the VLAN membership    def  lt list of port numbers gt  Defines which ports are members of this VLAN  Every port must be a  member of at least one VLAN  By default  it defines ports to VLAN 1    ena Enables this VLAN    dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration    del Deletes this VLAN    cur Displays the current VLAN configuration     IMPORTANT  All ports must belong to at least one VLAN  Any port which is removed from a VLAN and  which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN  1  You cannot remove a  port from VLAN  1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN  Also  you cannot add a 
171. meter Value  Baud Rate 9600  Data Bits 8  Parity None  Stop Bits 1  Flow Control None    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  8    To establish a console connection with the switch    Connect the terminal to the console port using the null modem cable   Power on the terminal    Press the Enter key a few times on the terminal to establish the connection     OO IA    You will be required to enter a password for access to the switch   For more information  see the    Setting  passwords    section in the    First time configuration    chapter      Setting an IP address    To access the switch via a Telnet or an SSH connection  you need to have an Internet Protocol  IP  address set for  the switch  The switch can get its IP address in one of the following ways     e Management port access     e Using a Dynamic Host Control Protocol  DHCP  server   When the  cfg sys dhcp command is  enabled  the management interface  interface 256  requests its IP address from a DHCP server  The  default value for the  cfg sys dhcp command is enabled     e Configuring manually   lf the network does not support DHCP  you must configure the management  interface  interface 256  with an IP address  If you want to access the switch from a remote network  you  also must configure the management gateway  gateway 4        Uplink port access     e Using a Bootstrap Protocol  BOOTP  server   By default  the management interface is set up to request  its IP address from a BOOTP s
172. mmand   cfg 12 thash     IP Trunk Hash Menu     set   IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu  cur   Display current IP trunk hash configuration       The following table describes the IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options     Table 117 IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options       Command Description  set Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu   cur Display current trunk hash configuration     Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash configuration    Command   cfg 12 thash set     set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu   smac Enable disable smac hash  dmac Enable disable dmac hash    sip Enable disable sip hash  dip Enable disable dip hash  cur Display current trunk hash setting          Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the switch  You can enable one or two parameters  to configure any of  the following valid combinations       SMAC  source MAC only      DMAC  destination MAC only      SIP  source IP only      DIP  destination IP only      SIP   DIP  source IP and destination IP      SMAC   DMAC  source MAC and destination MAC    The following table describes the IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options     Table 118 IP Trunk Hash Set Menu options                   Command Description   smac enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC   dmac enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC   sip enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP    dip enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP   cur Display current tru
173. n   IO MON ias 159  System  Maintenance  Opt Sii it 160  Forwarding Database Options     ooooccocccnccccconccnonncnnnnnonon corno no nnn conan nn ran n rra rra rre nr 160  Debugging OPIO Spot fi ta 161  ARP Cache Optica A A a 161  IP Route  Manipulation Options ss n a eA ca 162  IGMP MultiGast Group Options  cocoa ci 162  IGMP Snooping options siii A 162  IGMP Mrouter Options  reiua e reann nace aeaaeai aaa cans Iria IE iso lan ip 163  Uu    code fash GUMP rrr ert aoier trenari eiiaoe rei rap tea 163  FTEP TETR System Gump PUT sica a do aca 163  Clearing  dump information  menin eii eani eek eh aaa 164  Panic commMan inonsan a a Aa Aaa a ATOE Ta TANTE Ea O EAE ENE 164  Un  s  heduled  System JUMPS ias 164    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  7       Command line interface    Introduction    The 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box  Some of the more  advanced features  however  require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively     The extensive switching software included in the switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring  the switch     Built in  text based command line interfaces  AOS CLI and ISCLI  for access via a local terminal or remote  Telnet Secure Shell  SSH  session    Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP  support for access through network management software  such as NEC WebSAM NetvisorPro      A browser based management in
174. n internal MAC sublayer receive error    A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not  counted by the corresponding instance of the  dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object  the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors  object  or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object    The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance  of this object is implementation specific  In particular  an  instance of this object may represent a count of received errors  on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted     61    Interface statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  if    Interface statistics for port 1     Octets   UcastPkts   BroadcastPkts   ulticastPkts   Discards   Errors        ifHCOut Counters  51697080313 51721056808  65356399 65385714   0 6516    ifHCIn Counters    0  0  0       The following table describes the interface  IF  statistics for a selected port     Table 49 Interface statistics for port    Statistics  Octets IfHCIn    Description  The total number of octets received on the interface  including framing characters        UcastPkts   IfHCIn    The number of packets  delivered by this sublayer to a higher sublayer  which were  not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer        BroadcastPkts IfHCIn    The number of packets  delivered by this sublayer to a higher sublayer  which were  addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer        MulticastPkts   IfHCIn    The total number of packets  delivered by this sublayer  These ar
175. n nn rra nn rnn nn 134  VRRP Virtual Router ConfiguratiON      o oocoonncnnnncnoccnnnonncnonnononcnnnonn nan n cnn nr nn nen nn rn nn nr n enn rra ninas 135  VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking CONfiguratiON       oooconnconnncnnnccnonccnonncnannnnnrnnnnrn corno conan nn rn n cnn nnrnnn rca 136  VRRP Virtual Router Group ConfiguratiON      ooocnoccnnnncnnonccnonncnnnnnonnn conan cnnnn conan nn ran n rra rra n rr nn nr nn rnn rra cenar 136  VRRP Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking COnfiguratiON       ooonccnnnnncnnnncnoccnnnccnnncanc narco nano rra nn nnrnnnnnn conan 137  VRRP Interface configuratia E E 138  VRRE Tracking config  ratiom   egesi ienee a e a a aeaa d Eet 138  Quality of Service configuration   2    ee cece cece eeenee cece eeeeeeeeneeseaeeceaeeseaeeesaueeesaeeseaeeseaeeseeaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeseeseeaeeseaes 139  QoS 802 1 p confiQuration es neesiana EE sitesi sieve seine steed seine ATATEN ANEA 139  Access  Control Contig uration   peeraa ai 139  Access Control List COmfiQguration         ooococnccnonncnononnnncncnnrnnnnnncnnnnnnnno carne n rare nene rre 141  ACL Ethernet Fiter congu at N ie teats 141  ACL IP Version 4 Filter Configuration              ee eeseeeesnceeseceseeneceonerseneeesaceseeeeceanesseneeeeaeeeaeessanesseneneeneeeseneeseness 142  ACL TCP UDP Filter Configuration 0 0 2    ceeceeeseeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeesneessaeessaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeees 142  AGL Meter  Configuration ssia a ceda 143  ACL Remark configuration   yas d
176. n the    Configuration Menu    chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  155    When the above requirements are met  use the following procedure to download the new software to the switch   1  At the Boot Options  prompt  enter     Boot Options  gtimg    2  Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced           Enter name of switch software image to be replaced      imagel   image2   boot     lt image gt        3  Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server        Enter hostname or IP address of FTP TFTP server   lt server name or IP  address gt        4  Enter the name of the new software file on the server        Enter name of file on FTP TFTP server   lt filename gt     The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server  However  the file location is normally relative to the  TFTP directory     5  Enter the username  if you are using a FTP server        Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server   lt userID gt     6  Enter the password for the FTP server  if prompted         Enter password for username on FTP server   lt password gt     7    The system prompts you to confirm your request   You should next select a software image to run  as described in the    Selecting a Soft Image to Run    section     8  Ifyou are loading an image from which you are not currently booted  the system prompts you to change the  image     image2 currently contains Software Version 1 0 0  that was downloaded at 15 46
177. nal  capabilities  For example  routes originating from within the NSSA can be  propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas  External routes from  outside the Autonomous System  AS  can be advertised within the NSSA  but are not distributed into other areas    The default is transit        metric  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value  All routes received via  that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing  decisions    Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route   Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for  external routes  The default value is 1        auth none password md5    Defines the authentication method  as follows    e None  No authentication required    e Password  Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing  devices can participate    e MD5  This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is  required    The default is none        spf  lt 0 255 gt     Sets time interval between two successive SPF  shortest path first   calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra   s algorithm  The  default value is 10              enable Enables the OSPF area   disable Disables the OSPF area  This is the default   delete Deletes the OSPF area        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  125    Table 136 OSPF Area Index Configuration Menu options       Command Description  cur Disp
178. ng a privacy protocol  The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message  will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol  The authPriv  means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy  protocol        rview  lt 1 32  characters gt     Defines a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular  MIB view  If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no  access is granted        wview  lt 1 32  characters gt     Defines a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view   If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is  granted        nview  lt 1 32    Defines a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB          characters gt  view   del Deletes the View based Access Control entry   cur Displays the View based Access Control configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     95    SNMPvs Group configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 group  lt group number gt      SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu   model   Set security model  uname Set USM user name   Set group name    gname  del Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry  cur Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration       The following table describes the SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu options   Table 90 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu options    Command Desc
179. ng which configured gateway to use   gateway number  IP address  and health status   e  P forwarding information  Enable status  Inet and Imask     Port status       igmp    Displays IGMP Information Menu        vrrp    Displays the VRRP Information Menu        dump    Route information    Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu  10K or more  depending on  your configuration     If you want to capture dump data to a file  set your communication software on your  workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands     Command   info 13 route     IP Routing Menu     find  gw    type  tag  if  dump      Show a single route by destination IP address  Show routes to a single gateway  Show routes of a single type  Show routes of a single tag  Show routes on a single interface  Show all routes       Using the commands listed below  you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch     Table 27 Route Information menu options    Command    find  lt IP address gt     Usage    Displays a single route by IP address  For example                 100 10 1 1   gw  lt IP address gt  Displays routes to a single gateway  For example   100 10 1 2   type indirect direct local  Displays routes of a single type    broadcast  martian multicast   tag fixed static addr rip ospf   Displays routes of a single tag     broadcast  martian multicast       if  lt IP address gt     Displays routes on a single interface        dump    Display
180. nk hash configuration        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  114    Link Aggregation Control  Command   cfg 12 lacp     LACP Menu   sysprio Set  timeout Set  port LACP    Protocol configuration    LACP system priority    LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info    port Menu          cur Disp     lay current LACP configuration    The following table describes the LACP Configuration Menu options     Table 119 LACP Configuration Menu options       Command    sysprio  lt 1 65535 gt     Description    Defines the priority value  1 through 65535  for the switch  Lower numbers    provide higher priority  The default value is 32768        timeout short long    Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner   Choose short  3 seconds  or Long  90 seconds   The default value is Long   Note  We recommends that you use a timeout value of Long  to reduce  LACPDU processing  If your switch   s CPU utilization rate remains at 100  for  periods of 90 seconds or more  consider using static trunks instead of LACP        port  lt port number gt     Displays the LACP Port menu        cur    Display current LACP configuration        LACP Port configuration    Command   cfg 12 lacp port     LACP Port 2 Menu      lt port number gt     mode   Set LACP mode    prio   Set LACP port priority  adminkey   Set LACP port admin key          eur   Displ    lay current LACP port configuration    The following table describes the LAC
181. nnection    Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a switch via Telnet  this method does not  provide a secure connection  The Secure Shell  SSH  protocol enables you to securely log into the switch over the  network     As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration  SSH ensures that all data sent over the  network is encrypted and secure  In order to use SSH  you must first configure it on the switch  See the    Secure  Shell Server configuration    section in the    Configuration Menu    chapter for information on how to configure SSH     The switch can perform only one session of key cipher generation at a time  Therefore  an SSH Secure Copy  SCP   client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key generation at that time or if another client has just  logged in before this client  Similarly  the system will fail to perform the key generation if an SSH SCP client is  logging in at that time     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  9    The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below       Server Host Authentication   Client RSA authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection    Key Exchange   RSA    Encryption    e AES256 CBC   e AES192 CBC   e AES128 CBC    e  3DES CBC  e 3DES  e ARCFOUR      User Authentication   Local password authentication  Remote Authentication Dial in User Service  RADIUS   The following SSH clients are support
182. no parameter is  supplied  it displays information for all the interfaces   virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links        nbr  lt nbr router id  A B C D  gt     Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID  If no router ID  is supplied  it displays the information about all the current neighbors        dbase    Displays OSPF database menu        sumaddr  lt 0 2 gt     Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non NSSA areas        nsumadd  lt 0 2 gt     Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas        routes    Displays OSPF routing table        dump    Displays all OSPF information     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     43    OSPF general information    Command   info 13 ospf general    OSPF Version 2   Router ID  10 10 10 1   Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626  Area Border Router  yes  AS Boundary Router  no  LS types supported are 6   External LSA count 0   External LSA checksum sum 0x0   umber of interfaces in this router is 2   Number of virtual links in this router is 1   16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router  Total number of entries in the LSDB 10   Database checksum sum 0x0   Total neighbors are 1  of which                2 are  gt  INIT state   2 are  gt  EXCH state   2 are  FULL state  Number of areas is 2  of which 3 transit O nssa  Area Id   0 0 0 0  Authentication   none  Import ASExtern   yes  Number of times SPF ran  Area Bor
183. nonncnnnonnnncncnncnnnnnnnnn nen nono n crac nero 151  Restoring the active switch configuration      ooooocccnocccnnnccnonncnnoncnanononrnnnnnn nn non nono nn nan nn ran n rra n rra rr n rana 151  Operations Menu  OU e a a e o e o e do 153  MONA MON A A tada 153  Operations level port Options   0 0    eeeeeessecesneceeneeeseeessaeecsanecsanerseneeesaeessanecsaeesseneseeeeesacecsanesenereseeteneeeseaners 153  Operations level port 802 1X Options         eee eeeeeeesneeeeeceeseeeceenersneeeeeeeseaeeceanersaneneeeeeesaeeceanessneseeneneraneeseness 154  Operations level    VRRP OptONS  arcoiris 154    Boot Options Menu  INTO CIA A a A dls ei asl oe ease 155    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  6    MenuintormaliO ci A a a es Maeda eee 155    Updating the switch Software   Mage     oooonocccnocccnoocccooncnancnonononnno conc ccoo corn nn nan n nn ana nn anar rre nr nn nr rnn nn rana n ran nr narra nnnnnnns 155  Downloading new software to the SWITCH      ooooocccinnccioncccoonononnnononcnnnnnonon corno conan nn nan nn nana r anna rr n nr rr nr cnn nn 155  Selecting a software image to TUN   ooooconccconocinncncnonnnnonnnnn nono none 156  Uploading a software image from the SWITCH ooo    ee cece eeenee eset tees tees eeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeseeneeseaeeseaeeseeeseeeeee 157  Selecting a configuration DlOCK    cocoa 157  Resetting the switchixi 22   eck cite cache eh ate SA ait A 158  Accessing tne SC Ei alta toda 158  Maintenance Menu  o A A 159  Me
184. nship has been negotiated  and sequence numbers have been exchanged   across all OSPF areas and interfaces        exchange done    The sum total number of neighbors in this state  that is  in an adjacency s final  state  having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets  across  all OSPF areas and interfaces        bad requests    The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link  state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF  areas        bad sequence    The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received   that either    e Has an unexpected DD sequence number   e Unexpectedly has the init bit set   e Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database  Description packet    Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency   establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces        loading done    The sum total number of link state updates received for all out of date portions of  the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces           niway The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors  in which this router  is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas   rst_ad The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all    OPSF areas and interfaces        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  73    Table 66 OSPF global statistics       S
185. ntelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  151    Enter the password for the FTP server  if prompted      Enter password for username on FTP server   lt password gt        NOTE  The switch supports three configuration files  active  backup  and factory  See the    Selecting a  configuration block    section in the    Boot Options Menu    chapter for information on how to set which  configuration file to use upon boot up     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  152       Operations Menu    Introduction    Operations level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration  The  Operations Menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service  This menu is available only from an  administrator and operator login     Menu information    Command   oper     Operations Menu   port   Operational Port Menu  vrrp Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu    passwd Change current user password  clrlog Clear syslog messages  ntpreq Send NTP request       The following table describes the Operations Menu options     Table 182 Operations Menu options                Command Description   port  lt port number gt  Displays the Operational Port Menu    vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu    passwd  lt 1 128 Allows the user to change the password  You need to enter the current password in   characters gt  use for validation    clrlog Clears all Syslog messages  This command is available
186. ntication password   Set privacy protocol   Set privacy password   Delete usmUser entry   Display current usmUser configuration          You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model  An SNMP engine must have the  knowledge of applicable attributes of a user     This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user  You need to provide a security  name to create the USM entry     The following table describes the User Security Model Configuration Menu options     Table 87 User Security Model Configuration Menu options    Command  name  lt 1 32  characters gt     Description  Configures a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user  This is  the login name that you need in order to access the switch        auth md5 sha none    Configures the authentication protocol between HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA 96  The  default algorithm except usmUser 1 2 is none        authpw    Configures your password for authentication  If you selected an authentication algorithm  using the above command  you need to provide a password  otherwise you will get an  error message during validation        priv des none    Configures the type of privacy protocol on the switch  The privacy protocol protects  messages from disclosure  The options are des  CBC DES Symmetric Encryption  Protocol  or none  If you specify des as the privacy protocol  then be sure that you have  selected one of the authentication protocols  MD5 or HMA
187. o another computer over a network and executes commands in a secure  environment  All data using SSH is encrypted     Secure Shell can be configured on the switch using the console port and Telnet only  The menu options do not  display if you access the switch using the Browser based Interface  BBI      NOTE  See the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide for information on SSH     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  87    The following table describes the SSHD Configuration Menu options     Table 81 SSHD Configuration Menu options    Command  intrval  lt 0 24 gt     Description   Defines interval for auto generating the RSA server key  The switch will  auto generate the RSA server key at the interval defined in this  command  The value of zero  0  means the RSA server key auto   generation is disabled  If the switch has been busy performing any other  key generation and the assigned time of interval expires  the RSA  server will skip generating the key        scpadm    Defines the administrator password that is for Secure Copy  SCP  only   The username for this SCP administrator is scpadmin    Typically  SCP is used to copy files securely from one machine to  another  In the switch  SCP is used to download and upload the switch  configuration using secure channels        hkeygen    Generates the RSA host keys manually  The switch creates this key  automatically while configuring the switch with Secure Shell  SSH   But  you can gen
188. o reset UFD statistics  follow the  command  stats ufd with the following argument  clear     Command   stats ufd  lt clear gt     Uplink Failure Detection statistics     FDP number  1  umber of times LtM link failure   umber of times LtM link in Blocking State     umber of times LtD got auto disabled  1  FDP number  2    umber of times 1 link failure   umber of times 1 link in Blocking State   umber of times 1 got auto disabled  1   FDP number  3  umber of times 1 link failure   umber of times 1 link in Blocking State   umber of times 1 got auto disabled  1    FDP number  4    umber of times   link failure     umber of times 1 link in Blocking State                    umber of times 1 got auto disabled  1       The following table describes the Uplink Failure Detection  UFD  statistics     Table 77 Uplink Failure Detection statistics             Statistic Description   Number of times LtM link failure The total numbers of times that link failures were detected on the  uplink ports in the Link to Monitor group    Number of times LtM link in The total number of times that Spanning Tree Blocking state was   Blocking State detected on the uplink ports in the Link to Monitor group    Number of times LtD got auto The total numbers of times that downlink ports in the Link to   disabled Disable group were automatically disabled because of a failure in    the Link to Monitor group        Statistics dump    Command   stats dump    Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics ava
189. of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent        icmpOutTimestamps    The number of ICMP Timestamp  request  messages sent           icmpOutTimestampReps    The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent        icmpOutAddrMasks    The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent        icmpOutAddrMaskReps    The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  69    TCP statistics    Command   stats 13 tcp    TCP statistics   tcpRtoAlgorithm   tcpRtoMax    tcpActiveOpens     tcpAttemptFails   tcpInSegs   tcpRetransSegs   tcpCurBuff   tcpOutRsts     4 tcpRtoMin   240000 tcpMaxConn    252214 tcpPassiveOpens    528 tcpEstabResets   756401 tcpOutSegs   tcpinErrs   tcpCurConn        756655          The following table describes the Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  statistics     Table 62 TCP statistics    i a TL  Statistics    tcpRtoAlgorithm    Description    The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting  unacknowledged octets        tcpRtoMin    The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission  timeout  measured in milliseconds  More refined semantics for objects of this type  depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout  In  particular  when the timeout algorithm is rsre 3   an object of this type has the  semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in Request For Comments  RFC  793        tcpRtoMax    The maximum value permitted b
190. of the LSAs  The usage of this command is the  same as the usage of the command asbrsum        rtr  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     A B C D  gt   lt self gt      lt link state id    Displays the router  type 1  LSAs with detailed information of  each field of the LSAs  The usage of this command is the  same as the usage of the command asbrsum        self    Displays all the self advertised LSAs  No parameters are  required        summ  lt adv rtr  A B C D  gt     A B C D  gt   lt self gt      lt link state_id    Displays the network summary  type 3  LSAs with detailed  information of each field of the LSAs    The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the  command asbrsum        all    Displays all the LSAs     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     45    OSPF route codes information    Command   info 13 ospf routes    Codes  IA   OSPF inter area    1   OSPF NSSA external type 1  N2   OSPF NSSA external type 2   El   OSPF external type 1  E2   OSPF external type 2   IA 10 10 0 0 16 via 200 1 1 2   IA 40 1 1 0 28 via 20 1 1 2   IA 80 1 1 0 24 via 200 1 1 2   IA 100 1 1 0 24 via 20 1 1 2   IA 140 1 1 0 27 via 20 1 1 2   IA 150 1 1 0 28 via 20   E2 172 18 1 1 32 via 3   E2 172 18 1 2 32 via 3   E2 172 18 1 3 32 via 3   E2 172 18 1 4 32 via 3  3  3          E2 172 18 1 5 32 via  E2 172 18 1 6 32 via  E2 1712 18 1  7 32 via 30 1 1   E2 172 18 1 8 32 via 30 1 1 2             0   0   Os Lek   0 1 1   0   0   0   0       NNNNNNDNDNDy             R
191. ollows    auto  Configures the port to detect the link type  and automatically match its  settings    p2p  Configures the port for Point To Point protocol    shared  Configures the port to connect to a shared medium  usually a hub    The default link type is auto        edge disablelenable    Enables or disables this port as an edge port  An edge port is not connected to a  bridge  and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up  Configure server  ports as edge ports  enabled   By default  Ports 1 16 are configured as edge  ports              On Enables CIST on the port  This is the default for Ports 17 18 and 20 24   Off Disables CIST on the port   Cur Displays the current CIST port configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  109    Spanning Tree configuration  Command   cfg 12 stp  lt STG number gt      Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu   brg   Bridge parameter menu  port   Port parameter menu  add   Add VLAN s  to Spanning Tree Group  remov   Remove VLAN s  from Spanning Tree Group          clear   Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group  on Globally turn Spanning Tree ON   off Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF   default Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters  cur Display current bridge parameters                This switch supports the IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol  STP  and Cisco PVST  protocols  You can  configure up to 127 spanning tree groups on the switch  STG 128 is reserved for switch management   Spanning  Tree
192. on Menu options     Table 154 Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu options   Command Description   track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group  Tracking is  a proprietary extension to VRRP  used for modifying the standard priority system  used for electing the master router    vrid  lt 1 255 gt  Defines the virtual router ID   The vrid for standard virtual routers  where the virtual router IP address is not  the same as any virtual server  can be any integer between 1 and 255  All vrid  values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router   s IP interface   see if below  belongs  The default virtual router ID is 1    if  lt 1 256 gt  Selects a switch IP interface  The default switch IP interface number is 1    prio  lt 1 254 gt  Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group  This can be any  integer between 1 and 254  The default value is 100   During the master router election process  the routing device with the highest  virtual router priority number wins  If there is a tie  the device with the highest IP  interface address wins  If this virtual router s IP address  addr  is the same as  the one used by the IP interface  the priority for this virtual router will automatically  be set to 255  highest    When priority tracking is used   c  g 13 vrrp track or   cfg 13 vrrp vr   track   this base priority value can be modified  according to a number of performance and operational criteria                    adv
193. onds       mrto  lt 1 600 gt     Configures the age out period for the IGMP Mrouters in the Mrouter table  If the    switch does not receive a General Query from the Mrouter for mrto seconds  the    switch removes the multicast router from its Mrouter table   The range is from 1 to 600 seconds  The default is 255 seconds        qintrval  lt 1 600 gt     Sets the IGMP router query interval  The range is 1 600 seconds  The default value    is 125        robust  lt 2 10 gt     Configures the IGMP Robustness variable  which allows you to tune the switch for  expected packet loss on the subnet  If the subnet is expected to be lossy  high rate  of packet loss   then increase the value  The default value is 2        aggr disable enable    Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation  The default is enabled        srcip  lt IP address gt     Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific  Queries        add  lt 1 4094 gt     Adds the VLAN to IGMP Snooping        rem  lt 1 4094 gt     Removes the VLAN from IGMP Snooping        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     130    Table 144 IGMP Snoop Menu options                Command Description   clear Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping    fastlv  lt 1 4094 gt  Enables or disables Fastleave processing  Fastleave allows the switch to   disable enable immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list  if the host sends a Leave  message  and the proper conditions are met  Thi
194. ons        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  60    Table 48 Ethernet statistics for port  Statistics       dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors    Description   A count of frames for which transmission on a particular  interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error   A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not  counted by the corresponding instance of either the  dot3StatsLateCollisions object  the  dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object  or the  dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object    The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance  of this object is implementation specific  In particular  an  instance of this object may represent a count of transmission  errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted        dot3StatsFrameTooLongs    A count of frames received on a particular interface that  exceeds the maximum permitted frame size    The count represented by an instance of this object is  incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the  MAC service to the LLC  or other MAC user     Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  are  according to the conventions of IEEE 802 3 Layer  Management  counted exclusively according to the error status  presented to the LLC           dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface  fails due to a
195. ormation   a       11 layer 2 information       The following table describes the Layer 2 Information menu options     Table 18 Layer 2 information menu options    Command  fdb    Usage    Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu        lacp    Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu        8021x    Displays the 802 1x Information Menu        stp    In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled  you can view the following STP bridge    information   Priority    Hello interval    Forwarding delay   Aging time  You can also refer to the following port specific STP information   e Port number and priority    e Cost  e State    e  e  e Maximum age value  e  e       cist    Displays Common internal Spanning Tree  CIST  bridge information  including the following     e Priority      Hello interval  e Maximum age value   e Forwarding delay   You can also view port specific CIST information  including the following   e Port number and priority    e Cost  e State       trunk    When trunk groups are configured  you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups        vlan    Displays VLAN configuration information  including     e VLAN Number      VLAN Name    e Status    e Port membership of the VLAN       gen    Displays general Layer 2 configuration information        dump    Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu  10K or more  depending on your  configuration    If you want to capture dump data to a file  s
196. ort  lt port number gt  Displays all FDB entries for a particular port    vlan  lt 1 4095 gt  Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN    dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database    clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory  then adds    the static entries to the Forwarding Database     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     160    Debugging options    Command   maint debug        Miscellaneous Debug Menu   tbuf   Show MP trace buffer    snap   Show MP snap  or post mortem  trace buffer  clrc  g   Clear all flash configs       The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding  switch operation  You can view the following information using the Debug Menu       Events traced by the management processor  MP     Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs    If the switch resets for any reason  the management processor  MP  trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer  area  The output from these commands can be interpreted by NEC technical support     The following table describes the Miscellaneous Debug Menu options     Table 189 Miscellaneous Debug Menu options    Command Usage  tbuf Displays the management processor trace buffer  Header information similar to the following is  shown     MP trace buffer at 13 28 15 Fri May 25  2002  mask  Ox2ffdf748  The buffer information is displayed after the header           snap Displays the management 
197. outer Redundancy Protocol Menu   rtrid  lt IP address gt  Configures the Router ID    cur Displays the current IP configuration     IP interface configuration    Command   cfg 13 if  lt 1 256 gt      IP Interface Menu   addr Set IP address  mask Set subnet mask  vlan Set VLAN number  relay Enable disable BOOTP relay  ena Enable IP interface  dis Disable IP interface  del Delete IP interface  cur Display current interface configuration          The switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces  Each IP interface represents the switch on an IP subnet  on your network  The IP Interface option is disabled by default  Interface 256 is reserved for switch management     The following table describes the IP Interface Configuration Menu options     Table 123 IP Interface Configuration Menu options       Command Description   addr  lt IP address gt  Configures the IP address of the switch interface  using dotted decimal notation   For example  192 2 14 101   mask  lt IP subnet mask gt  Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal    notation  For example  255 255 255 0       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  117    Table 123 IP Interface Configuration Menu options    Command    vlan  lt 1 4094 gt     Description  Configures the VLAN number for this interface  Each interface can belong to one  VLAN  though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it                    relay Enables or disables BOOTP relay on thi
198. outing Information Protocol information  Command   info 13 rip     RIP Information Menu     routes   Show RIP routes  dump   Show RIP user s configuration       The following table describes the Routing Information Protocol information menu options     Table 34 RIP information          Command Usage  routes Displays information about RIP routes   dump  lt 0 255 gt  Displays RIP user s configuration  Enter O  zero  for all interfaces        RIP Routes information    Command   info 13 rip routes     gt  gt  IP Routing   info 13 rip routes    3 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 11 metric 4  4 0 0 0 16 via 30 1 1 11 metric 16  10 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 2 metric 3  20 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 2 metric 2       This table contains all dynamic routes learned through RIP  including the routes that are undergoing garbage  collection with metric   16  This table does not contain directly connected routes and locally configured static routes     RIP user configuration  Command   info 13 rip dump  lt 0 255 gt     RIP USER CONFIGURATION   RIP on updat 30   RIP Interface 2   102 1 1 1  enabled   version 2  listen enabled  supply enabled  default none       poison disabled  trigg enabled  mcast enabled  metric 1  auth none key none   RIP Interface 3   103 1 1 1  enabled   version 2  listen enabled  supply enabled  default none  poison disabled  trigg enabled  mcast enabled  metric 1       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  46    IP information    Command   info 13 ip    Interface infor
199. p  The  range is 1 16        comm  lt 1 16 gt     Configures a community table entry  The community table contains objects for  mapping community strings and version independent SNMP message parameters   The range is 1 16        taddr  lt 1 16 gt     Configures the destination address and user security levels for outgoing notifications   This is also called the transport endpoint  The range is 1 16        tparam  lt 1 16 gt     Configures SNMP parameters  consisting of message processing model  security  model  security level  and security name information  There may be multiple transport  endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters  or a particular  transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters        notify  lt 1 16 gt     Configures a notification index  A notification application typically monitors a system  for particular events or conditions  and generates Notification Class messages based  on these events or conditions  The range is 1 16        viv2 disable enable    Enables or disables the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2  This command is  enabled by default        cur    Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     93    User Security Model configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm  lt usm number gt      SNMPv3 usmUser 1    name  auth  authpw    priv  privpw  del  cur    Menu    Set USM user name   Set authentication protocol   Set authe
200. pInHeaderError The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s  destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity  the switch     ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their    continued processing  but which were discarded  for example  for lack of buffer space    Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re   assembly        Link statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  link    Link statistics for port 1     linkStateChange        The following table describes the link statistics for a selected port     Table 51 Link statistics for port  Statistic Description  linkStateChange The total number of link state changes     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     63    Port RMON statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  rmon    RMON statistics for port 2   etherStatsDropEvents   etherStatsOctets   etherStatsPkts   etherStatsBroadcastPkts   etherStatsMulticastPkts   etherStatsCRCAlignErrors   etherStatsUndersizePkts   etherStatsOversizePkts   etherStatsFragments   etherStatsJabbers   etherStatsCollisions   etherStatsPkts640Octets   etherStatsPkts65to1270ctets   etherStatsPkts128to2550ctets   etherStatsPkts256to5110ctets   etherStatsPkts640ctets   etherStatsPkts1024to15180ctets        Z  D          oOo    OOo 0 0 0  0 0 O O O OS   O 0          The following table describes the
201. parameters are used to modify MST operation on an individual port basis  CIST parameters do not affect    operation of STP PVST    Port parameters include       Port priority    Port path cost    Port Hello time      Link type  e Edge    On and off      Current port configuration    The following table describes the commands used to configure CIST Port Configuration Menu options     Table 110 CIST Port Configuration Menu options    Command  prior  lt 0 240 gt     Description   Configures the CIST port priority  The port priority helps determine which bridge  port becomes the designated port  In a network topology that has multiple bridge  ports connected to a single segment  the port with the lowest port priority  becomes the designated port for the segment  The range is 0 to 240  in steps of  16  0  16  32      and the default is 128        cost  lt 1 200000000 gt     Configures the CIST port path cost  The port path cost is used to help determine  the designated port for a segment  Generally speaking  the faster the port  the  lower the path cost  The default is 20000 for Gigabit ports        hello  lt 1 10 gt     Configures the CIST port Hello time  The Hello time specifies how often the root  bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit  BPDU   Any bridge that  is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value  The range is 1 to 10  seconds  and the default is 2 seconds        link auto p2p shared    Defines the type of link connected to the port  as f
202. period  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for an EAP   Response ldentity frame from the supplicant  client  before retransmitting an  EAP Request Identity frame  The default value is 30 seconds        suptmout  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for an EAP Response  packet from the supplicant  client  before retransmitting the EAP Request  packet to the authentication server  The default value is 30 seconds        svrtmout  lt 1 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits for a response from the  Radius server before declaring an authentication timeout  The default value is  30 seconds    The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access Request  packet containing the supplicant   s  client s  EAP Response packet is  determined by the current setting of  cfg sys radius timeout   default is 3 seconds         maxreq  lt 1 10 gt     Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP   Request packet to the supplicant  client   The default value is 2        raperiod  lt 1 604800 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits before re authenticating a  supplicant  client  when periodic re authentication is enabled  The default  value is 3600 seconds        reauth on loff    Sets the re authentication status to on or of f  The default value is of           default    Resets the global 802 1x parameters to their default values        cur    Displays curr
203. port     802 1x stat    istics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  8021x    Authenticator Statistics   eapolFramesRx  eapolFramesTx  eapolStartFramesRx  eapolLogoffFramesRx  eapolRespIdFramesRx   apolRespFramesRx  eapolRegldFramesTx  eapolReqFramesTx  invalidEapolFramesRx  eapLengthErrorFramesRx  lastEapolFrameVersion  lastEapolFrameSource                Authenticator Diagnostics  authEntersConnecting    authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting  authEntersAuthenticating          authSuccessesWhileAuth    authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating  authFailWhileAuthenticating  authReauthsWhileAuthenticating  authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating    authEapLogoffWhileAuthe  authReauthsWhileAuthent  authEapStartsWhileAuthe  authEapLogoffWhileAuthe  backendResponses   backendAccessChallenges  backendOtherRequestsTosS                backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant      backendAuthSuccesses  backendAuthFails             0 00 00 00 00 00    nticating    nticating  icated  nticated  nticated    upplicant          Y Qi O O Oo OO Oo Oo    0 Oo OOo Om    The following table describes the 802 1x authenticator diagnostics for a selected port     Table    46 802 1x statistics for port    Statist    ics    Authenticator Diagnostics    Description       authEntersConnecting    Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the  CONNECTING state from any other state        authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED
204. port to more  than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on  See the tag command  in the    Port configuration     section earlier in this chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  116    Layer 3 configuration  Command   cfg 13     Layer 3 Menu   if Interface Menu  gw Default Gateway Menu  route Static Route Menu  arp ARP Menu  frwd Forwarding Menu  nwf Network Filters Menu  rmap Route Map Menu  rip Routing Information Protocol Menu  ospf Open Shortest Path First  OSPF  Menu  igmp IGMP Menu  dns Domain Name System Menu  bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu  vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu  rtrid Set router ID  cur Display current IP configuration       The following table describes the Layer 3 Configuration Menu options     Table 122 L3 Configuration Menu options                                              Command Description   if  lt 1 256 gt  Displays the IP Interface Menu    gw  lt 1 4 gt  Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu    route Displays the IP Static Route Menu    arp Displays the ARP  Address Resolution Protocol  Menu   frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu    nwf  lt 1 256 gt  Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu    rmap  lt 1 32 gt  Displays the Route Map Menu    rip Displays the Routing Information Protocol Menu   osp   Displays the OSPF Menu    igmp Displays the IGMP Menu    dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu    bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu    vrrp Displays the Virtual R
205. processor snap  or post mortem  trace buffer  This buffer contains  information traced at the time that a reset occurred   clrc  g Deletes all flash configuration blocks  The next time the switch is rebootea  it returns to the factory    default settings        ARP cache options    Command   maint arp     Address Resolution Protocol Menu   find   Show a single ARP entry by IP address  port Show ARP entries on a single port    vian Show ARP entries on a single VLAN   addr Show ARP entries for switch s interfaces  dump Show all ARP entries   clear Clear ARP cache       The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol Menu options     Table 190 Address Resolution Protocol Menu options                   Command Usage   find  lt IP address gt  Shows a single ARP entry by IP address  For example   192 4 17 35   port  lt port number gt  Shows ARP entries on a single port    vlan  lt 1 4095 gt  Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN    addr Shows the list of IP addresses that the switch will respond  to for ARP requests    dump Shows all ARP entries    clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory     NOTE  To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch  or a portion according to one of the options  listed on the menu above  find  port  vlan  dump   see the    ARP information    section of the    Information Menu     chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  161    IP Route Manipulation options    Command   maint route     I
206. ption   vr  lt 1 255 gt  Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu  This menu is used for configuring up to 255  virtual routers on this switch    group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu  used to combine all virtual routers    together as one logical entity  Group options must be configured when using two or  more swiches in a hot standby failover configuration where only one switch is active  at any given time              if  lt 1 255 gt  Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu    track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu  This menu is used for weighting the criteria used  when modifying priority levels in the master router election process    on Globally enables VRRP on this switch        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  134    Table 151 VRRP Configuration Menu options       Command Description  ot Globally disables VRRP on this switch  This is the default   cur Displays the current VRRP parameters     VRRP Virtual Router configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp vr  lt 1 255 gt      VRRP Virtual Router 1 Menu   track    vrid    addr    if    prio    adver  preem  ena  dis  del  cur    Priority Tracking Menu    Set  Set    virtual router ID  IP address       Set  Set  Set    interface number  renter priority  advertisement interval          Enable disable preemption   Enable virtual router   Disable virtual router   Delete virtual router   Display current VRRP virtual router configuration       This menu is used for configuring virtu
207. r    IP address    205 178 18 66 255 255 255 255 00 70 cf 03 20 04  205 178 50 1 255 255 255 255 00 70 cf 03 20 04       Show all ARP entry information  Command   info arp dump    address    192 168 2 4    8b b2 32     192 168 2 19 A SLES 2Z92 89   192168 52 61 3  6a ed 46        The Flag field provides additional information about an entry  If no flag displays  the entry is normal     Table 31 ARP dump flag parameters          Flag Description   P Permanent entry created for switch IP interface    R Indirect route entry    U Unresolved ARP entry  The MAC address has not been learned     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  42    OSPF information    Command   info 13 ospf     OSPF Information Menu   general   Show general information  aindex  if  virtual    nbr  dbase  sumaddr  nsumadd  routes  dump       nn y Nn nn un    how area s  information   how interface s  information  how details of virtual links  how neighbor  s  information  atabase Menu   how summary address list   how NSSA summary address list  how OSPF routes   how OSPF information       The following table describes the OSPF Menu options     Table 32 OSPF information       Command    general    Usage    Displays general OSPF information        aindex  lt 0 2 gt     Displays area information for a particular area index  If no parameter is  supplied  it displays area information for all the areas           if  lt 1 256 gt  Displays interface information for a particular interface  If 
208. rence Guide  AOS  150    Dump    Command   cfg dump    The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen  To start the dump program  at the  Configuration  prompt  enter     Configuration  dump    The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values  The screen display  can be captured  edited  and placed in a script file  which can be used to configure other switches  Paste the  configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch  The active configuration can  also be saved or loaded via FTP TFTP     Saving the active switch configuration    Command   cfg ptcfg  lt FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename gt     When the ptcfg command is used  the active configuration commands of the switch  as displayed using   cf  g dump  will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the FTP TFTP server  To start the switch  configuration upload  at the Configuration  prompt  enter     Configuration  ptcfg  lt FTP TFTP server gt   lt filename gt     Where  lt FTP TFTP server gt  is the FTP TFTP server IP address or hostname and  lt filename gt  is the name of the  target script configuration file     Enter the user name  if you are using a FTP server     Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server   lt userID gt        Enter the password for the FTP server  if prompted         Enter password for username on FTP server   lt password gt     NOTE  The output file is
209. rent ACLs for this port    The following table describes the port ACL QoS Configuration Menu options   Table 102 Port ACL QoS Configuration Menu options       Command Description    add acl  lt 1 762 gt   grp  lt 1 762 gt  Assigns an ACL or ACL Group to the port        rem acl  lt 1 762 gt   grp  lt 1 762 gt  Removes an ACL or ACL Group from the port        cur Displays current port ACL QoS parameters        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  103    Layer 2 configuration    Command   cfg 12     Layer 2 Menu   8021x  mrst  stp  fdb  trunk    thash  lacp  vlan  upfast  update  cur    02 1x Menu   ultiple Spanning Tree Rapid Spanning Tree Menu  panning Tree Menu   DB   Trunk Group Menu   IP Trunk Hash Menu   Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  VLAN Menu   Enable disable Uplink Fast   UplinkFast station update rate   Display current layer 2 parameters             The following table describes the Layer 2 Configuration Menu options     Table 103 L2 Configuration Menu options       Command Description  8021x Displays the 802 1x Configuration Menu   mrst Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration    Menu        stp  lt 1 128 gt     Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu                       fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Configuration Menu    trunk  lt 1 12 gt  Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu for the selected trunk  1 12    thash Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu    lacp Displays the Link 
210. ription    model Defines the security model     usm snmpvl   snmpv2       uname  lt 1 32  characters gt     Sets the user name as defined in  cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm name  The  User name can have a maximum of 32 characters        gname  lt 1 32    Configures the name for the access group as defined in          characters gt   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access name  The group name can have a  maximum of 32 characters    del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry    cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration     SNMPv3 Community Table configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 comm  lt comm number gt      SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu     index   Set community index  name   Set community string    uname   Set USM user name   tag Set community tag   del Delete communityTable entry   cur Display current communityTable configuration       This command is used for configuring the community table entry  The configured entry is stored in the community  table list in the SNMP engine  This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration  Datastore  LCD  of SNMP engine     The following table describes the SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu options     Table 91 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu options                   Command Description   index  lt 1 32 Configures the unique index value of a row in this table  The index can have a maximum  characters gt  of 32 characters    name  lt 1 32 Defines a readable 32 characters string 
211. rk Filter Configuration Menu options    Command  addr  lt IP address gt     Description  Sets the starting IP address for this filter  The default address is 0 0 0 0       mask  lt IP subnet mask gt     Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with  cfg 13 nwf addr to  define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when  the filter is enabled  The default value is 0 0 0 0                enable Enables the Network Filter configuration    disable Disables the Network Filter configuration    delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration    current Displays the current the Network Filter configuration     Route Map configuration    Command   cfg 13 rmap     IP Route Map  alist  metric  type    prec  enable  disable  delet     lt 1 32 gt     Menu    Access List number   Set metric of the matched rout   Set OSPF metric type of the matched rout  Set the precedence of this route map  Enable route map   Disable route map                current    Delete route map  Display current route map configuration          Routing maps control and modify routing information  The map number  1 32  represents the routing map you wish    to configure     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  120    The following table describes the Route Map Configuration Menu options     Table 130 Route Map Configuration Menu options    Command  alist  lt 1 8 gt     Description  Displays the Access List menu        metric  lt 0 16777214 gt  none    Sets the metric of t
212. rom 0 to 60 seconds  The default is 2  seconds        retry  lt 1 120 gt     Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this  default gateway inoperative  The range is from 1 to 120 attempts  The default is 8  attempts        arp disable enable    Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  health checks  This  command is disabled by default                 ena Enables the gateway for use    dis Disables the gateway    del Deletes the gateway from the configuration   cur Displays the current gateway settings     NOTE  Gateway 4 is reserved for switch management interface     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  118    IP Static Route configuration  Command   cfg 13 route     IP Static Route Menu   add   Add static route    rem   Remove static route  cur   Display current static route configuration       The following table describes the IP Static Route Configuration Menu options     Table 125 IP Static Route Configuration Menu options          Command Description   add  lt IP address gt   lt IP Adds a static route  You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address   subnet mask gt   lt gateway gt  destination subnet mask  and gateway address  Enter all addresses using dotted   lt interface gt  decimal notation    rem  lt IP address gt   lt IP Removes a static route  The destination address of the route to remove must be  subnet mask gt  specified using dotted decimal notation    cur Displays the curren
213. rotocol being processed by the local  bridging function  including bridge management frames        dot1lPortOutFrames    The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its  segment    A frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is counted  by this object  if and only if  it is for a protocol being processed by the  local bridging function  including bridge management frames        dot1lPortInDiscards    Count of valid frames received which were discarded  that is  filtered  by  the forwarding process           dot1lTpLearnedEntryDiscards    The total number of Forwarding Database entries  which have been or  would have been learned  but have been discarded due to a lack of space  to store them in the Forwarding Database    If this counter is increasing  it indicates that the Forwarding Database is  regularly becoming full  a condition which has adverse performance  effects on the sub network     If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing  it  indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent        dot1StpPortForwardTransitions    The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to  the Forwarding state     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     59    Ethernet statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  ether       Ethernet statistics for port 1   dot3StatsAlignmentErrors   dot3StatsFCSErrors           dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrame
214. s        The following table describes the management port CPU utilization statistics     Table 73 CPU statistics          Statistics Description   cpuUtillSecond The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second  This is shown as a percentage   cpuUtil4Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds  This is shown as a percentage   cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds  This is shown as a percentage     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  78    Access Control List  ACL  statistics menu  Command   stats acl     ACL Menu   acl   Display ACL stats    dump   Display all available ACL stats  clracl   Clear ACL stats       The following table describes the Access Control List  ACL  Statistics menu options     Table 74 ACL statistics menu options             Command Usage  acl  lt 1 762 gt  Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL   dump Displays all ACL statistics   clracl Clear all ACL statistics   ACL statistics    Command   stats acl dump    Hits for ACL 1  26057515  Hits for ACL 2  26057497          SNMP statistics    Command   stats snmp    SNMP statistics   snmpInPkts   snmpInBadC tyNames   snmpInASNParseErrs   snmpOutPkts   snmpInTooBigs   snmpInBadValues   snmpInGenErrs   snmpInTotalSetVars   snmpInGetNexts   snmpInGetResponses   snmpOutTooBigs   snmpOutBadValues   snmpOutGenErrs   snmpOutGetNexts   snmpOutGetResponses   snmpSilentDrops     snmpInBadVersions   snmpInBadC tyUses   snmpEnableAuthTraps   snmpInBa
215. s    Limits the number of multicast packets per second to the specified  value  If disabled  dis   the port forwards all multicast packets        drate  lt 0 262143 gt  dis    Limits the number of unknown unicast packets per second to the  specified value  If disabled  dis   the port forwards all unknown  unicast packets              ena Enables the port    dis Disables the port  To temporarily disable a port without changing its  configuration attributes  see the    Temporarily disabling a port    section  later in this chapter    cur Displays current port parameters     Temporarily disabling a port    To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes  enter the following command at    any prompt     Main   oper port  lt port number gt  dis    Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port  you do not need to use apply or save  The port state  will revert to its original configuration when the switch is reset  See the    Menu information    section in the     Operations Menu    chapter for other operations level commands     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  102    Port link configuration    Command   cfg port  lt port number gt  gig     Gigabit Link Menu   speed Set link speed  mode Set full or half duplex mode    EGEL Set flow control  auto Set auto negotiation  cur Display current gig link configuration       Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link     Link menu option
216. s   dot3Stats    dot3StatsLateCollisions   dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions              dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors     dot3StatsFrameTooLongs        dot 3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors     ultipleCollisionFrames     Oo00000000o       The following table describes the Ethernet statistics for a selected port     Table 48 Ethernet statistics for port  Statistics       dot3StatsAlignmentErrors    Description   A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not  an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the  Frame Check Sequence  FCS  check    The count represented by an instance of this object is  incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the  MAC service to the Logical Link Control  LLC   or other MAC  user     Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  are  according to the conventions of IEEE 802 3 Layer  Management  counted exclusively according to the error status  presented to the LLC        dot3StatsFCSErrors       A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an  integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame  Check Sequence  FCS  check    The count represented by an instance of this object is  incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by  the MAC service to the LLC  or other MAC user     Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  are  according to the conventions of IEEE 802 3 Layer  Management  counted exclusively according to the error stat
217. s  vlan   Show groups on a single vlan    POTE Show groups on a single port    trunk Show groups on a single trunk  dump Show all groups  clear Clear group tables       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  162    The following table describes the IGMP Snoop Maintenance Menu options     Table 193 IGMP Snooping Menu options                Command Usage   find  lt IP address gt  Shows a single IGMP Multicast group by IP address   vlan  lt 1 4094 gt  Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single VLAN   port  lt port number gt  Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single port   dump Shows all IGMP Multicast groups    clear Clears IGMP Multicast data from switch memory     IGMP Mrouter options    Command   maint igmp mrouter     IGMP Multicast Routers Menu   vlan   Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan    dump   Show all multicast router ports  clear   Clear multicast router port table       The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu options     Table 194 IGMP Multicast Group Menu options          An A         Command Usage  vlan  lt 1 4094 gt  Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single VLAN   dump Shows all IGMP Multicast routers   clear Clears IGMP Multicast router data from switch memory     Uuencode flash dump  Command   maint uudmp    Using this command  dump information is presented in uuencoded format  This format makes it easy to capture the  dump information as a file or a string of characters     If you want to cap
218. s 1 second        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  127    Table 138 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu options                         Command Description   retra  lt 1 3600 gt  Configures the retransmit interval in seconds  The default value is 5 seconds   key  lt key string gt  none Sets the authentication key to clear the password    mdkey  lt 1 255 gt  none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface  The default is none    enable Enables the OSPF interface    disable Disables the OSPF interface  This is the default    delete Deletes the OSPF interface    cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface     OSPF Virtual Link configuration  Command   cfg 13 ospf virt  lt 1 3 gt      OSPF Virtual Link 1 Menu   aindex   Set area index  hello Set hello interval in seconds  dead Set dead interval in seconds  trans Set transit delay in seconds  retra Set retransmit interval in seconds    nbr Set router ID of virtual neighbor   key Set authentication key   mdkey Set MD5 key ID   enable Enable interface   disable Disable interface   delet Delete interfac   cur Display current OSPF interface configuration                The following table describes the OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu options   Table 139 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu options                                        Command Description   aindex  lt 0 2 gt  Configures the OSPF area index  The default is 0    hello  lt 1 65535 gt  Configures the authentication parameters of a hel
219. s IP interface  The default is enabled   ena Enables this IP interface    dis Disables this IP interface    del Removes this IP interface    cur Displays the current interface settings     NOTE  If you enter an IP address for interface 1  you are prompted to change the BOOTP setting  Interface  256 is reserved for switch management interface     Default Gateway configuration    Command   cfg 13 gw  lt 1 4 gt      Default gateway 1 Menu     Set IP address   Set interval between ping attempts   Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN  Enable disable ARP only health checks    addr  intr  retry    arp  ena  dis  del  cur       Enable default gateway    Disable default gateway  Delete default gateway  Display current default gateway configuration          The switch supports up to four gateways  By default  no gateways are configured on the switch  Enter 1  2  3  or 4  in the command as the  lt gateway number gt   depending upon which gateway you want to configure  Gateway 4 is  reserved for switch management     The following table describes the Default IP Gateway Configuration Menu options     Table 124 Default IP Gateway Configuration Menu options    Command    addr  lt IP address gt     Description    Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation   For example  192 4 17 44       intr  lt 0 60 gt     The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it is up  The intr option sets the  time between health checks  The range is f
220. s all routes configured in the switch     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  40    Show all Route information  Command   info 13 route dump    Status code   Destination                                             The following table describes the Type parameter     Table 28 IP Routing Type information     0    LOS       Gateway    broadcast broad  direct fixed  local addr  broadcast broadcast  indirect ospf  indirect static  direct fixed  PANAS  broadcast broadcast 2  martian martian       209 00a 00 multicast addr                      Field Description   indirect The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be  forwarded through a router at the Gateway address    direct Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet  attached to the switch    local Indicates a route to one of the switch   s IP interfaces    broadcast Indicates a broadcast route    martian The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered  out  Packets to this destination are discarded    multicast Indicates a multicast route     The following table describes the Tag parameter     Table 29 IP Routing Tag information                      Field Description   fixed The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the  switch    static The address is a static route which has been configured on  the Switch    addr The address belongs to one of the switch   s IP interfaces    rip The address was learned by the Routing Information  Protocol  RIP     osp
221. s are described in the following table and display on the Gigabit port configuration menus for the  switch  Using these configuration menus  you can set port parameters such as speed  duplex  flow control  and  negotiation mode for the port link     The following table describes the Gigabit Link Configuration Menu options     Table 101 Gigabit Link Configuration Menu options    Command Description   speed 10 100 1000 any Sets the link speed  Not all options are valid on all ports  The choices include   e 10Mb s  e 100 Mb s  e 1000 Mb s    e    any     for automatic detection  default   Note  Ports 1 18 are set to 1000 Mb s  and cannot be changed   mode full halflany Sets the operating mode  Not all options are valid on all ports  The choices  include   e  Full duplex  e Half duplex  e    Any     for automatic detection  default   Note  Ports 1 16 are set to  Any  and Ports 17 18 are set to full duplex  These  ports cannot be changed   fctl rx tx both none Sets the flow control  The choices include   e Receive  rx  flow control  e     Transmit  tx  flow control  e Both receive and transmit flow control  default   e No flow control  auto onloff Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port  The default is enabled   cur Displays current port parameters     Port ACL QoS configuration    Command   cfg port  lt port number gt  aclqos                 Port 20 ACL Menu   add   Add ACL or ACL group to this port    rem   Remove ACL or ACL group from this port       cur   Display cur
222. s command is disabled by default    ena Enables IGMP Snooping    dis Disables IGMP Snooping  This is the default    cur Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters     IGMP static multicast router configuration  Command   cfg 13 igmp mrouter     Static Multicast Router Menu   add   Add port as Multicast Router Port    rem   Remove port as Multicast Router Port  cur   Display current Multicast Router configuration       The following table describes the Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu options     NOTE  When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN  the process of learning multicast routers is  disabled for that VLAN     Table 145 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu   Command Description   add  lt port number gt   lt 1 4094 gt   lt 1 2 gt  Selects a port VLAN combination on which the static multicast  router is connected  and configures the IGMP version  1 or 2  of  the multicast router   Note  Port number must be an external port  20 24     remove  lt port number gt   lt 1 4094 gt   lt 1 2 gt  Removes a static multicast router from the selected port VLAN  combination    cur Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters           IGMP filtering configuration    Command   cfg 13 igmp igmpflt     IGMP Filter Menu   filter   IGMP Filter Definition Menu  port IGMP Filtering Port Menu    ena Enable IGMP Filtering  dis Disable IGMP Filtering  Cut Display current IGMP Filtering configuration          The following table describes the IGMP Filter Conf
223. s the executable code running on the switch  A version of the image ships with the  switch  and comes pre installed on the device  As new versions of the image are released  you can upgrade the  software running on the switch     Upgrading the software image on the switch requires the following       Loading the new image onto a FTP TFTP server on your network    Downloading the new image from the FTP TFTP server to the switch    Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset    Downloading new software to the switch    The switch can store up to two different software images  called image1 and image2  as well as boot software   called boot  When you download new software  you must specify where it should be placed  either into image     image2  or boot     For example  if your active image is currently loaded into image1  you would probably load the new image software  into image2  This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image  stored in image1   if needed     To download new software to the switch  you will need the following       The image or boot software loaded on a FTP or TFTP server on your network    The hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server     The user name and password for FTP server  if necessary     The name of the new software image or boot file    NOTE  The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames  See the    Domain name system  configuration    section i
224. sce syns cb  A ios 11  Typographical Cove ii ad 11  Menu basics  IO A tensa nigen egestas 12  Main Men   vve cc  sitrrcoent deport hs depen eaeel ah bettie debenacsee l detec edie a are a a e itda ena pep iatea nhc 12  MOUSE Aa eat 12  Gl  bal commands cuco A 13  Command line history and editing           ooooccnncccnnconnnonononnnnnano nano nononcnnnn corno nn nnn conan nn cnn rra nn enn nnn nn rana r rana nr anne rnn nana 14  Command line interface ShOrtCuUtS     oooocccinccccoocccanancnonccnnancnnncn aata edana nn nn nn nan n rra eai ren nn enn daaa dabi Aaea ai daenda hidi 15  Command stacking i a tl g0s capa scteestee races 15  Command ADD Aci 15  TabCO platica A Sh a See ee ee Aaaa ai 15  First time configuration  INtTOAUCTION eesc  A O 16  Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol support          eee eee cence cence eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeseeneeeeneeeaes 16  Setting  PASSWOrdS   omo 17  Changing the default administrator password    oooococcccnncccnncccnonncnnoncnannnnnonc nora nono coran nn nan nn naar rra nana n nn rnr cnn cnn 17  Changing the default user passwOTO    oooocccnocccnocccoooncnnonnnnon conan cnnnn conan nn nnn nn rana r nn nn rre nn rn nn n nena r ne rn narran 18  Changing the default operator password     ooooccoccccnocccnoncnonnnononcnnnn conan cnn nnnnn ono nn ocn nn nn rnn nr rana rra rra nn rr nen nn 19  Information Menu  A O o 20  AE aaa a peeve a a a E bests a e E naive ein ite eet ene 20  System    Information  Me cuca aaaea Sa aaa S aa
225. scribes the System Access Configuration menu options     Table 95 System Access Configuration Menu options                               Command Description   mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu    user Displays the User Access Control Menu    http Enables or disables HTTP  Web  access to the Browser based Interface  It is enabled by  disable enable default    https Displays the HTTPS Menu    wport  lt TCP port Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content  The default is HTTP port 80   number gt    snmp disable read  Disables or provides read only write read SNMP access    only read write   tnet Enables or disables telnet server  The default is enabled    disable enable   tnport  lt TCP port Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet  number gt  sessions on a non standard port  The default is telnet port 23    tport  lt TFTP port Sets an optional TFTP server port number for cases where the server listens for TFTP  number gt  sessions on a non standard port  The default is TFTP port 69    cur Displays the current system access parameters     Management Networks configuration    Command   cfg sys access mgmt     Management Networks Menu   add   Add mgmt network definition    rem   Remove mgmt network definition  cur   Display current mgmt network definitions       The following table describes the Management Networks Configuration menu options  You can configure up to 10  management networks on the switch    
226. sed to indicate the condition      EMERG   indicates the system is unusable     ALERT   indicates action should be taken immediately     CRIT   indicates critical conditions     ERR   indicates error conditions or eroded operations     WARNING   indicates warning conditions     NOTICE   indicates a normal but significant condition     INFO   indicates an information message     DEBUG    indicates a debug level message    System user information  Command   info sys user    Usernames   user   enabled  oper   disabled       admin   Always Enabled   Current User ID table   1  name techl   ena  cos user   password valid  online  2  name tech2   ena  cos user   password valid  offline       The following table describes the User Name information     Table 17 User Name Information menu             Field Usage   user Displays the status of the user access level    oper Displays the status of the oper  operator  access level   admin Displays the status of the admin  administrator  access level   Current User Displays the status of configured User ID    ID Table    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  28    Layer 2 information    Command   info 12     Layer 2 Menu     fdb  lacp  8021x  stp  SISE  trunk  vlan  gen  dump    Forwarding Database Information Menu    Link  Show  Show  Show  Show  Show  Show  Dump    Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  802 1x information   STP information   CIST information   Trunk Group information   VLAN information   general inf
227. sent  This object is a 64 bit version of  ifOutBroadcastPkts        MulticastPkts   IfHCOut    The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted   and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer  including those  that were discarded or not sent    For a MAC layer protocol  this includes both group and functional addresses  This  object is a 64 bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts        Discards   I fHCOut    The number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no  errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted  One possible reason for  discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space           Errors   I fHCOut    For packet oriented interfaces  the number of outbound packets that could not be  transmitted because of errors    For character oriented or fixed length interfaces  the number of outbound  transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors     Internet Protocol  IP  statistics    Command   stats port  lt port number gt  ip       ipInReceives       ipInHeaderError   ipInDiscards    GEA IP statistics for port 1        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  62    The following table describes the Internet Protocol  IP  statistics for a selected port     Table 50 IP statistics for port             Statistics Description   ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces  including those received in  error    i
228. sily     Command stacking    As a shortcut  you can type multiple commands on a single line  separated by forward slashes      You can connect  as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want     For example  the keyboard shortcut to access the Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP  Configuration  Menu from the Main  prompt is              Main  cfg sys ssnmp name       Command abbreviation    Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters that distinguish the command from the others  in the same menu or submenu     For example  the command shown above could also be entered as              Main  c sys ssn n       Tab completion    By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and pressing the Tab key  the CLI will display all  commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter  Entering additional letters will further refine the list of  commands or options displayed     If only one command fits the input text when the Tab key is pressed  that command will be supplied on the  command line  waiting to be entered  If the Tab key is pressed without any input on the command line  the currently  active menu displays     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  15       First time configuration    Introduction    This chapter describes how to perform first time configuration and how to change system passwords     To begin first time configuration of the switch  perform the following steps  
229. snmpNotifyEntry   Tag This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the    snmpTargetAddrTable  Any entry inthe snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag  value equal to the value of this entry is selected  If this entry contains a value of zero length  no  entries are selected     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  25    SNMPv3 dump    Command   info sys snmpv3 dump    Engine ID   80 00 07 50 03 00 0F 6A F8 EF 00    usmUser Table   User Name Protocol          TH  NO PRIVACY  adminmd5 ES PRIVACY  adminsha ES PRIVACY  viv2only PH  NO PRIVACY          vacmAccess Table   Group Nam ReadV WriteV NotifyV       noAuthNoPriv  vlv2grp noAuthNoPriv viv2only  admingrp authPriv    vacmViewTreeFamily Table   View Name      included  viv2only i included  viv2only   DO Li excluded  viv2only APARE excluded  viv2only ARS EES PS A excluded    vacmSecurityToGroup  Sec Model User Nam Group Name       viv2only  admin admin  adminsha admingrp    snmpCommunity Table   User Name    snmpNotify Table     snmpTargetAddr Table   Transport Addr Port Taglist Params    snmpTargetParams Table   MP Model User Name          N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  26    System information    Command   info sys gen    System Information at 6 56 22 Thu Jan 11  2006    Time zone  Asia Tokyo    Blade Network Technologies 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch  sysName    sysLocation    RackId  NECO1A 6X00125   RackName  Default_Rack_ Name   Enclosur
230. state    Hops Shows the maximum number of bridge hops allowed before a packet is dropped        Priority  port     The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  designated port  In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to  a single segment  the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated  port for the segment        Cost    The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a  segment  Generally speaking  the faster the port  the lower the path cost  A  setting of zero  0  indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after  the link speed has been auto negotiated        State    Shows the current state of the port  The state field can be one of the following   Discarding  DISC   Learning  LRN   Forwarding  FWD   or  Disabled  DSB         Role    Shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree  The port role can be one  of the following  Designated  DESG   Root  ROOT   Alternate  ALTN   Backup   BKUP   Master  MAST   or Unknown  UNK         Designated Bridge    Shows information about the bridge connected to each port  if applicable   Information includes the priority  hex  and MAC address of the Designated Bridge        Designated Port    The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected   Information includes the port priority  hex  and the port number  hex               Hello The hello time parameter specifies  in seconds  ho
231. swords  as shown in the following procedure     1   2     Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password   From the Main Menu  use the following command to access the Configuration Menu     Main  cfg    From the Configuration Menu  use the following command to select the System Menu      gt  gt  Configuration  sys    Enter the following command to set the operator password        System  access user opw    Enter the current administrator password at the prompt     Only the administrator can change the user password  Entering the administrator password confirms your  authority        Changing OPERATOR password  validation required          Enter current administrator password     Enter the new operator password at the prompt        Enter new operator password     Enter the new operator password  again  at the prompt           Re enter new operator password     Apply and save the changes     System  apply    System  save    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS        19       Information Menu    Introduction    You can view configuration information for the switch in the user  operator  and administrator command modes   This chapter discusses how to use the CLI to display switch information     Menu overview    Command   info     Information Menu     sys  12  13    qos  acl    rmon  link  port      System Information Menu  Layer 2 Information Menu  Layer 3 Information Menu  QOS Menu   Access Control List Menu  Show RMON information  Show l
232. t    cur      Displays the current RMON Alarm parameters     enu    Enable Disable Mirroring   onitoring Port based PM Menu   Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports          The Port Mirroring Configuration Menu is used to configure  enable  and disable the monitored port  When enabled   network packets being sent and or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port  By attaching  a network analyzer to the monitor port  you can collect detailed information about your network performance and  usage  Port mirroring is disabled by default     NOTE  See the    Troubleshooting tools    appendix in the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application  Guide for information on how to use port mirroring     The following table describes the Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options     Table 176 Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options    Command  mirror disable enable    Description  Enables or disables port mirroring  The default is disabled        monport  lt port number gt     Displays port mirroring menu        cur    Port based port mirroring    Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports     Command   cfg pmirr monport  lt port number gt      Port 1 Menu   add  rem  delet    Add  Mirrored  port    Rem  Mirrored  port       cur    Delete this    Monitor    port  Display current Port based Port Mirroring configuration       The following table describes the port based Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options     N8406 023 1Gb Intellig
233. t   hello interval in seconds   dead interval in seconds  transit delay in seconds  retransmit interval in seconds  authentication key   MD5 key ID    Enable interface  Disable interface          delet    Del       cur    te interfac    Display current OSPF interface configuration       The following table describes the OSPF Interface Configuration Menu options     Table 138 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu options       Command  aindex  lt 0 2 gt     Description  Configures the OSPF area index  The default is 0        prio  lt 0 255 gt     Configures the assigned priority value to the OSPF interfaces     A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest  A priority value of 0  specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router  DR  or  Backup Designated Router  BDR    The default value is 1        cost  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures cost set for the selected path   preferred or backup  Usually the cost  is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface  Low cost indicates  high bandwidth  The default value is 1        hello  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the  interfaces  The default value is 10 seconds        dead  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures the health parameters of a hello packet  which is set for an interval  of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down  The default value is 40  seconds        trans  lt 1 3600 gt     Configures the transit delay in seconds  The default value i
234. t  including those on current connections but  excluding those containing only retransmitted octets        tcpRetransSegs    The total number of segments retransmitted  that is  the number of TCP segments  transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets           tcpln     Errs    The total number of segments received in error  for example  bad TCP checksums         tcpCurBuff    The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol  stack        tcpCurConn    The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened        tcpOutRsts    The number of TCP segments sent containing the reset  RST  flag     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  70    UDP statistics    Command   stats 13 udp    UDP statistics     udpInDatagrams   udpInErrors        udpOutDatagrams  43  udpNoPorts  1578077       The following table describes the User Datagram Protocol  UDP  statistics              Table 63 UDP statistics   Statistics Description   udpInDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch    udpOutDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this switch    udpInErrors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons  other than the lack of an application at the destination port    udpNoPorts The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at       the destination port     IGMP Multicast Group statistics    Command   stats
235. t IP configuration     Address Resolution Protocol configuration    Command   cfg 13 arp     ARP Menu   static   Static ARP Menu    rearp   Set re ARP period in minutes  cur   Display current ARP configuration       Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  is the TCP IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer  ARP resolves a  physical address from an IP address  ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses  ARP  also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory  In any IP communication  the ARP cache is  consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache  Then the  corresponding physical address is used to send a packet     The following table describes the ARP Configuration Menu options     Table 126 ARP Configuration Menu options          Command Description   static Displays the Static ARP Menu    rearp  lt 2 120 gt  Defines re ARP period in minutes  You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes   The default value is 10 minutes    cur Displays the current ARP configurations     Static ARP configuration    Command   cfg 13 arp static     Static ARP Menu   add   Add a parmanent ARP entry    del   Delete an ARP entry  clear   Clear static ARP entries  cur   Display current static ARP configuration       The following table describes the Static ARP Menu optionons     Table 127 Static ARP Configuration Menu options             Command Description   add  lt IP address gt   lt MAC address 
236. tSave Allows the client  or the Web browser  to accept the certificate and save the  certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted   cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration     Port configuration  Command   cfg port  lt port number gt      Port 1 Menu   gig Gig Phy Menu  aclqos Acl Qos Configuration Menu  8021ppri Set default 802 1p priority  pvid Set default port VLAN id  name Set port name  rmon Enable Disable RMON for port  tag Enable disable VLAN tagging for port  tagpvid Enable disable tagging on pvid  media Current media copper fiber  fiber Set fiber  copper Set copper  automedia   Set Auto  brate Set BroadCast Threshold  mrate Set MultiCast Threshold  drate Set Dest  Lookup Fail Threshold  ena Enable port  dis Disable port  cur Display current port configuration                This menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports  This command is enabled by default     NOTE  Port 19 is a port for switch management interface  interface 256      N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  101    The following table describes the Port Configuration Menu options     Table 100 Port Configuration Menu options       Command Description  gig Displays theGigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu   aclqos Displays the Access Control List  ACL  Quality of Service  QoS     configuration menu        8021ppri  lt 0 7 gt     Configures the port s 802 1p priority level        pvid  lt 1 4095 gt     Sets the default VLAN num
237. tation  to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  20    System Information Menu  Command   info sys     System Menu     snmpv3    general    log  user  dump    SNMPv3 Information Menu  Show  Show  Show  Dump    general system information  last 100 syslog messages  current  user Status   all system information       The following table describes the System Information Menu options     Table 7 System Information Menu options    Command    snmpv3    Usage  Displays the SNMP v3 Menu        general    Displays system information  including   System date and time   Switch model name and number  Switch name and location   Time of last boot   MAC address of the switch management processor  IP address of IP interface   Hardware version and part number  Software image file and version number  Configuration name   Log in banner  if one is configured       log    Displays 100 most recent syslog messages        user    Displays the User Access Information        dump    Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu  10K or more  depending on  your configuration         SNMPv3 Information Menu    Command   info sys snmpv3     SNMPv3 Information Menu   usm  view  access  group    comm  taddr  tparam  notify  dump    S    ANNNNNNN    NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW  NOW       usmUser table information  vacmViewTreeFamily table information  vacmAccess table information  vacmSecurit
238. tatistic    down    Description    The total number of Neighboring routers down  that is  in the initial state of a  neighbor conversation  across all OSPF areas and interfaces        Intf Change Stats                 up The sum total number of interfaces up in all OSPF areas    down The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas    loop The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all  OSPF areas and interfaces    unloop The sum total number of interfaces  connected to the attached network in all OSPF    areas        wait timer    The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired  indicating the end of  the waiting period that is required before electing a  Backup  Designated Router  across all OSPF areas and interfaces        backup    The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for  all OSPF areas and interfaces        nbr change    The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated  with any interface across all OSPF areas        Timers Kickoff                       hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired  which triggers the  send of a Hello packet  across all OPSF areas and interfaces    retransmit The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF  areas and interfaces    lsa lock The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement  LSA  lock timer has  been fired across all OSPF areas and int
239. te   forward flood trunk ifmac   dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database     Show all FDB information    Command   info 12 fdb dump    Port Trnk State    1    23  23  23  23  23  23  23  23  23  23  23  23                Cy  gt  e 0  ie Ds a E e E ade i  Oo0o0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0Oo0oOoOo       Oo0o0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0Oo0ooOo          TO O GOG OO GOG OOGO O QOQ G  Oo0o0O0O0O0O0O0O0O00O0OooOo          OOO GO 0 OO oa Oo O  Y    CS O O CD O 0 OOO O             GM Y Y Y Y Y Y Y y ly WW Y  Oo0o0O0O0O0O00O0O0O00O0Oo0ooOoOo  Oo0o0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0OoOoOo       VUVUUUUO UU U O UUOUUOOA       An address that is in the forwarding  FWD  state indicates that the switch has learned it  When in the trunking   TRK  state  the Trnk field displays the trunk group number  If the state for the port is listed as unknown  UNK   the  MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch  but has only been seen as a destination address  When an  address is in the unknown state  no outbound port is indicated     Clearing entries from the forwarding database    To delete a static MAC address from the forwarding database  FDB   see the    Static FDB configuration    section in  the    Configuration Menu    chapter  To clear the entire forwarding database  FDB   see the    Forwarding Database  options    section in the    Maintenance Menu    chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  30    Link Aggregation Control Protocol information    Command   info 12 lacp     LAC
240. telligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  135    Table 152 VRRP Configuration Menu options  Command Description    preem disable enable Enables or disables master preemption  When enabled  if this virtual router is in  backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master  this virtual router  will preempt the lower priority master and assume control  Note that even when  preen is disabled  this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this  switch is the owner  the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the  same   By default  this option is enabled                 ena Enables this virtual router    dis Disables this virtual router  This is the default    del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration    cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router     VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp vr  lt 1 255 gt  track     VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu   vrs   Enable disable tracking master virtual routers    ifs   Enable disable tracking other interfaces  ports   Enable disable tracking VLAN switch ports  cur   Display current VRRP virtual router configuration          This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual  routers  Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results  Each time one of the tracking criteria is  met  the priority level for the virtual router 
241. ter Priority Tracking Menu are  enabled     The following table describes the VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu options     Table 157 VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu options    Command Description  vrs  lt 0 254 gt  Defines the priority increment value  0 through 254  for virtual routers in master  mode detected on this switch  The default value is 2        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  138    Table 157 VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu options             Command Description   ifs  lt 0 254 gt  Defines the priority increment value  0 through 254  for active IP interfaces  detected on this switch  The default value is 2    ports  lt 0 254 gt  Defines the priority increment value  0 through 254  for active ports on the virtual  router   s VLAN  The default value is 2    cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values        Quality of Service configuration    Command   cfg qos     00S Menu   8021p   802 1p Menu    Use the Quality of Service  QoS  menus to configure the IEEE 802 1p priority value of incoming packets  This  allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic  and provide different priority levels  The following table  describes the QoS Configuration Menu options     Table 158 QoS Configuration Menu options       Command Description  8021p Displays 802 1p configuration menu        QoS 802 1p configuration    Command   cfg qos 8021p     802 1p Menu   prig   Set priority to COS queue mapping  
242. terface for interactive network access through the Web browser    The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch  configuration  Using a basic terminal  you can view information and statistics about the switch  and perform any  necessary configuration     This chapter explains how to access the AOS CLI to the switch     Additional references    Additional information about installing and configuring the switch is available in the following guides  which are  attached in this product     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch User s Guide   N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide   N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  ISCLI   N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Browser based Interface Reference Guide    Connecting to the switch    You can access the command line interface in one of the following ways       Using a console connection via the console port    Using a Telnet connection over the network    Using a Secure Shell  SSH  connection to securely log in over a network    Establishing a console connection  To establish a console connection with the switch  you need       A null modem cable with a female DB 9 connector  See the N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Users  Guide tor more information        An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table  below    Table 1 Console configuration parameters                Para
243. that represents the corresponding value of an  characters gt  SNMP community name in a security model    uname  lt 1 32 Defines the name as defined in  cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm name  The name  characters gt  can have a maximum of 32 characters    tag  lt 1 255 Configures a tag of up to 255 characters maximum  This tag specifies a set of transport  characters gt  endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap    del Deletes the community table entry    cur Displays the community table configuration     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  96    SNMPv3 Target Address Table configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 taddr  lt taddr number gt      SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu   name   Set target address nam  addr Set target transport address IP  port Set target transport address port       taglist Set tag list   pname Set targetParams name   del Delete targetAddrTable entry   cur Display current targetAddrTable configuration       This menu allows you to configure an entry of a transport address that transmits SNMP traps   The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu options   Table 92 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu options                      Command Description   name  lt 1 32 Configures the locally arbitrary  but unique identifier  target address name associated with  characters gt  this entry    addr  lt transport Configures a transport address IP that can be use
244. the BOOTP server  For example   100 10 1 1   addr2  lt IP address gt  Sets the IP address of the secondary BOOTP server  For example   100 10 1 2   on Globally turns on BOOTP relay    off Globally turns on BOOTP relay  This is the default    cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration     Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp     Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu   vr   VRRP Virtual Router Menu  group   VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu  if   VRRP Interface Menu    track VRRP Priority Tracking Menu   on Globally turn VRRP ON   off Globally turn VRRP OFF   cur Display current VRRP configuration       Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol  VRRP  support on the switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN   This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP   capable routing device  One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master  based on a number of priority  criteria  and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address  If the master fails  one of the backup virtual  routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address     By default  VRRP is disabled  For more information on VRRP  see the    High Availability    chapter in the N8406 023  1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Application Guide     The following table describes the VRRP Configuration Menu options     Table 151 VRRP Configuration Menu options       Command Descri
245. the switch  was manufactured  Under certain circumstances  it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default   This can be useful when a custom configured switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re   configured for a different purpose     Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset     1  At the Boot Options  prompt  enter     Boot Options  conf    2  Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use     The system indicates which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset  and prompts  you to enter a new choice     Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset        Specify new block to use   active   backup   factory       N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  157    Resetting the switch    You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur     Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart  This process can be lengthy  depending on the  topology of your network     To reset the switch  at the Boot Options  prompt  enter      gt  gt  Boot Options  reset    You are prompted to confirm your request     To display current boot options  enter      gt  gt  Boot Options  cur    Accessing the ISCLI    To access the ISCLI  enter the following command from the AOS CLI  and reset the switch     Boot Options  mode iscli    The d
246. thentication is enabled  The default  value is 3600 seconds        reauth on loff    Sets the re authentication status to on or of f  The default value is of                 default Resets the port 802 1x parameters to their default values   global Applies the global 802 1x parameters to this port   Cur Displays current port 802 1x parameters        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  106    Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol   Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  configuration  Command   cfg 12 mrst   Multiple Spanning Tree Menu   cist   Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu    name Set MST region name  rev Set revision level of this MST       p    region    maxhop Set Maximum Hop Count for MST  4   60   mode Spanning Tree Mode  on Globally turns RSTP MSTP ON  off Globally turns RSTP MSTP OFF  cur Display current MST parameters             The switch supports the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  RSTP  and IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning  Tree Protocol  MSTP   MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of spanning tree groups  each  with its own topology     You can configure up to 32 spanning tree groups on the switch  MRST is turned off by default     NOTE  When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on  VLAN 1 is moved from Spanning Tree Group 1 to the  Common Internal Spanning Tree  CIST   When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off  VLAN 1 is moved back  to Spanning Tree Group 1    The following table describes the Multiple Spanning Tree Conf
247. threshold crossing  event index to fire on falling threshold crossing  owner for the alarm    te this alarm and restore defaults       cur    Display current alarm configuration       The Alarm RMON group can track rising or falling values for a MIB object  The MIB object must be a counter   gauge  integer  or time interval  Each alarm index must correspond to an event index that triggers once the alarm  threshold is crossed  The switch supports up to 30 Alarm Groups     The following table describes the RMON Alarm Menu options   Table 175 RMON Alarm Menu options    Command    oid  lt 1 127 characters gt     Description  Configures an alarm MIB Object Identifier   The alarm OID can have a maximum of 127 characters        intrval  lt 1 65535 gt     Configures the time interval over which data is sampled and compared  with the rising and falling thresholds   The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds  The default is 1800 seconds        sample abs delta    Configures the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating  the value to be compared against the thresholds  as follows    abs  absolute value  the value of the selected variable is compared  directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval    delta  delta value  the value of the selected variable at the last sample is  subtracted from the current value  and the difference compared with the  thresholds    The default is abs        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  147    T
248. tics    tcp Displays Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  statistics  Add the  argument  clear  to clear TCP statistics    udp Displays User Datagram Protocol  UDP  statistics  Add the  argument  clear  to clear UDP statistics    igmp Displays IGMP statistics    ospf Displays OSPF statistics menu    vrrp When virtual routers are configured  you can display the  following  e Advertisements received  vrrpInAdvers   e Advertisements transmitted  vrrpOutAdvers   e Advertisements received  but ignored  vrrpBadAdvers    clrvrrp Clears all VRRP statistics    rip Displays Routing Information Protocol  RIP  statistics       clrigmp  lt 1 4095 gt  all    Clears all IGMP statistics for the selected VLANs           ipclear Clears IP statistics  Use this command with caution as it will  delete all the IP statistics   dump Displays all Layer 3 statistics     GEA Layer 3 statistics menu    Command   stats 13 geal3       13bucket   Show G    dump         Dump G    EA Layer 3 Statistics Menu     EA L3 bucket for an IP address  EA layer 3 stats counter       The following table describes the Layer 3 GEA statistics menu options     Table 56 Layer 3 GEA statistics menu options    Command  13bucket    Usage  Displays GEA statistics for a specific IP address        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L8 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  66    Table 56 Layer 3 GEA statistics menu options    Command  Dump    GEA Layer 3 statistics    Usage  Displays all GEA statistics     Command   stats 13 geal3 dump      
249. tion    Command   cfg 12 8021x global     802 1x Global Configuration Menu   mode    qtperiod  txperiod  suptmout    svrtmout  maxreq  raperiod  reauth  default  cur    set  set  set  set  Set    access control mode          set  Set  Set    EAP Request Identity quiet time interval  EAP Request Identity retransmission timeout  EAP Request retransmission timeout    server authentication request timeout    max number of       EAP Request retransmissions    reauthentication time interval  reauthentication status to on or off    Restore default 802 1x configuration  Display current 802 1x configuration       The global 802 1x menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the switch  The following table  describes the 802 1x Global Configuration Menu options     Table 105 802 1x Global Configuration Menu options    Command    mode force   unauth auto force auth    Description    Sets the type of access control for all ports    e force unauth  the port is unauthorized unconditionally    e auto  the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  RADIUS server    e force auth  the port is authorized unconditionally  allowing all traffic    The default value is force auth        qtperiod  lt 0 65535 gt     Sets the time  in seconds  the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP   Request  Identity frame to the supplicant  client  after an authentication failure  in the previous round of authentication  The default value is 60 seconds        tx
250. to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree  CIST  is enabled or disabled  you can view the following  CIST bridge information      Status of Uplink Fast  upfast      CIST root     CIST regional root     Priority     Maximum age value     Forwarding delay     Hops   You can also refer to the following port specific CIST information       Port number and priority      Cost    State    Role      Designated bridge and port    Hello interval    Link type and port type    N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS     37    The following table describes the CIST parameters     Table 24 Common Internal Spanning Tree parameter descriptions    Parameter  CIST Root    Description    Shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree   CIST   Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root           CIST Regional Root    Shows information about the root bridge for this MSTP region  Values on this row  of information refer to the regional root        Priority  bridge     The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become  the STP root bridge              MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies  in seconds  the maximum time the bridge  waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it  reconfigures the STP network    FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies  in seconds  the amount of time that a  bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding 
251. tries in the Forwarding Database and the Address Resolution  Protocol  ARP  and routing tables  This menu is available only from an administrator and operator login     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  12    Global commands    Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy  These commands are useful for obtaining  online Help  navigating through menus  and for applying and saving configuration changes     For help on a specific command  type help  The following screen displays        help  lines  diff  ping  pushd          Global Commands     The following are used to navigate the menu structure   Print current menu     can be issued from any menu     up print pwd  verbose exit quit  apply save revert  traceroute telnet history  popd who         Top menu if first  or command separator    Execute command from history    menu level          The following table describes the global commands     Table 4 Global commands    Command      command or help    Action   Provides usage information about a specific command on the current menu  When  used without the command parameter  a summary of the global commands is  displayed                             or print Displays the current menu       Or up Moves up one level in the menu structure      If placed at the beginning of a command  displays the Main Menu  Otherwise  this is  used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line    lines Sets the number of lines  n  that displa
252. ture dump information to a file  set your communication software on your workstation to capture  session data prior to issuing the uudmp command  This will ensure that you do not lose any information  Once  entered  the uudmp command will cause approximately 23 300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and  copied into the file     Using the uudmp command  dump information can be read multiple times  The command does not cause the  information to be updated or cleared from flash memory     Dump information is not cleared automatically  In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash  memory  you must manually clear the dump region  For more information on clearing the dump region  see the     Clearing dump information    section later in this chapter     To access dump information  at the Maintenance  prompt  enter     Maintenance  uudmp    The dump information is displayed on your screen and  if you have configured your communication software to do  so  captured to a file  If the dump region is empty  the following displays     No FLASH dump available     FTP TFTP system dump put    Command   maint ptdmp  lt server gt   lt filename gt     Use this command to put  Save  the system dump to a FTP or TFTP server    NOTE  If the FTP TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system  the specified ptdmp file  must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command  and must be writable  set with proper permission  and not  locked by any application   
253. umber of TACACS  server retries   timeout value of TACACS  server retries   TACACS  back door for telnet ssh http https  secbd   Enable disable TACACS  secure backdoor for telnet ssh http https  cmap Enable disable TACACS  new privilege level mapping   usermap Set user privilege mappings   on Enable TACACS   off  cur                authentication  Disable TACACS  authentication  Display current TACACS  settings                TACACS   Terminal Access Controller Access Control System  is an authentication protocol that allows a remote  access server to forward a user s logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be  allowed to a given system  TACACS  and Remote Authentication Dial In User Service  RADIUS  protocols are  more secure than the TACACS encryption protocol  TACACS  is described in RFC 1492     TACACS  protocol is more reliable than RADIUS  as TACACS  uses the Transmission Control Protocol  TCP   whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol  UDP   Also  RADIUS combines authentication and  authorization in a user profile  whereas TACACS  separates the two operations     TACACS  offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device       TACACS  is TCP based  so it facilitates connection oriented traffic      It supports full packet encryption  as opposed to password only in authentication requests     lt supports decoupled authentication  authorization  and accounting    The following table describes the TACACS  Serv
254. uration Menu options     Table 156 VRRP Interface Configuration Menu options       Command Description   auth none password Defines the type of authentication that will be used  none  no authentication   or  password  password authentication   The default is none    passw  lt password gt  Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long  This password will be    added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password  authentication is chosen  see auth above            del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface  The IP  interface itself is not deleted   cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface   s authentication parameters     VRRP Tracking configuration    Command   cfg 13 vrrp track     VRRP Tracking Menu   vrs   Set priority increment for virtual router tracking    ifs   Set priority increment for IP interface tracking  ports   Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking  cur   Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration       This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router  election process  Each time one of the tracking criteria is met  the priority level for the virtual router is increased by  an amount defined through this menu     NOTE  These priority tracking options only define increment values  These options do not affect the VRRP  master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Rou
255. us  presented to the LLC        dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames    A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular  interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one  collision    A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also  counted by the corresponding instance of the ifOutUcastPkts   ifOutMulticastPkts  or ifOutBroadcastPkts  and is not counted  by the corresponding instance of the  dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object        dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames    A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular  interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one  collision    A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also  counted by the corresponding instance of either the  ifOutUcastPkts  ifOutMulticastPkts  or ifOutBroadcastPkts  and  is not counted by the corresponding instance of the  dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object        dot3StatsLateCollisions    The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular  interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a  packet    Five hundred and twelve bit times corresponds to 51 2  microseconds on a 10 Mbit s system  A  late  collision included  in a count represented by an instance of this object is also  considered as a  generic  collision for purposes of other  collision related statistics           dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions    A count of frames for which transmission on a particular  interface fails due to excessive collisi
256. ut       hEapLogof  WhileAuthenticating    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING  as a result of an EAPOL Logoff  message being received from the Supplicant        aut          hReauthsWhileAuthenticated    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING  as a result of a re authentication  request        aut       hEapStartsWhileAuthenticated    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING  as a result of an EAPOL Start  message being received from the Supplicant        aut       hEapLogof  WhileAuthenticated    Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED  as a result of an EAPOLLogoff  message being received from the Supplicant           backendResponses Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access   Request packet to the Authentication server  Indicates that the  Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server    backendAccessChallenges Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access     Challenge packet from the Authentication server  Indicates that the  Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator        bac       kendOtherRequestsToSupplicant    Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request  packet  other than an Identity  Notification  Failure  or Success  message  to the Suppl
257. val   Set NTP server resync interval       tzone   Set NTP timezone offset from GMT    dlight Enable Disable daylight savings time  on Turn NTP service ON          off Turn NTP service OFF          cur Display current NTP configuration    This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol  NTP  server  By default  this  option is disabled     The following table describes the NTP Server Configuration Menu options     Table 84 NTP Server Configuration Menu options                Command Description   prisrv  lt IP address gt  Configures the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to  synchronize the switch clock    secsrv  lt IP address gt  Configures the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to  synchronize the switch clock    intrval  lt 1 44640 gt  Specifies the interval  that is  how often  in minutes  1 44640   to resynchronize  the switch clock with the NTP server  The default is 1440 minutes    on Enables the NTP synchronization service    off Disables the NTP synchronization service  This is the default    cur Displays the current NTP service settings     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  91    System SNMP configuration    Command   cfg sys ssnmp     SNMP Menu   snmpv3 SNMPv3 Menu  name Set SNMP  sysName   locn Set SNMP  sysLocation   cont Set SNMP  sysContact   rcomm Set SNMP read community string    wcomm Set SNMP write community string   timeout Set timeout for the SN
258. ve been applied but not saved to flash memory by entering  diff flash at any CLI prompt       diff flash    Applying pending changes    To make your configuration changes active  you must apply them  To apply configuration changes  enter the  following command at any prompt       apply  NOTE  All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied     Reverting changes    The revert command removes configuration changes that have been made  but not applied  Enter revert apply  to remove all changes that have not been saved       revert    Saving the configuration    In addition to applying the configuration changes  you can save them to flash memory on the switch   IMPORTANT  If you do not save the changes  they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted   To save the new configuration  enter the following command at any prompt       save    When you save configuration changes  the changes are saved to the active configuration block  The configuration  being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block  If you do not want the previous  configuration block copied to the backup configuration block  enter the following instead       save n    You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch  Your options include       The active configuration block     The backup configuration block     Factory default configuration block   You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not sa
259. ved to flash memory using the diff  flash command  It is a global command that can be executed from any prompt     For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset  see the    Selecting a configuration  block    section in the    Boot Options Menu    chapter     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  84     lt     Reminders    CLI reminders prompt users to complete configuration tasks that require multiple steps  The default setting for CLI  reminders is enabled  Use the following command to disable CLI reminders   cfg sys reminders dis    The following is an example of a configuration task performed with CLI reminders enabled      gt  gt  Layer 2  vlan 5    VLAN number 5 with name  VLAN 5  created     Reminder      gt  gt  VLAN 5  add 9    VLAN 5 needs to be enabled     Port 9 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1     Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 5  y n   y       Current ports for VLAN 5  empty    Pending new ports for VLAN 5  9    Reminder     Reminder     System configuration    Command   cfg sys     System Menu     syslog  sshd  radius  tacacs   ntp  ssnmp  access  date  time  timezon    Port 9  VLAN 5    needs to be enabled     needs to be enabled        Syslog Menu   SSH Server Menu   RADIUS Authentication Menu  TACACS  Authentication Menu  NTP Server Menu   System SNMP Menu   System Access Menu   Set system dat   Set system tim             olddst  dlight  idle  notice  bannr  hprompt  bootp  dhcp  rem
260. w often the root bridge  transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit  BPDU   Any bridge that is not  the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value    Type Type of link connected to the port  and whether the port is an edge port  Link type    values are AUTO  P2P  or SHARED     Trunk group information    Command   info 12 trunk    Trunk group 1   port  state     Enabled       17  STG 1 forwarding  18  STG 1 forwarding          When trunk groups are configured  you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups     NOTE  If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding  the remaining ports in  the trunk group will also be set to forwarding     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  38    VLAN information    Command   info 12 vlan    Status    Default VLAN  pc03p   pco7f   pc04u  8600 14  8600 15  8600 16  8600 17  35k 1   35k 3   35k 4   pco7z  redlan  ixiaTraffic  bpsports    Mgmt VLAN             Ports    14   15   16   17   18   20   21   22   24   L  T2 TS  23  3 6 8 10  19    This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state     VLAN information includes     VLAN Number   VLAN Name   Status   Port membership of the VLAN    Layer 2 general information    Command   info 12 gen    STP uplink fast mode   disabled    The following table describes the Layer 2 general information     Table 25 Layer 2 general information    Field Description  STP
261. which are monitored in the LtM group include port link   state moving to down  or port state moving to Blocking if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled     The following table describes the Uplink Failure Detection  UFD  Configuration Menu options     Table 178 Uplink Failure Detection Configuration Menu options             Command Description   fdp  lt FDP number gt  Displays the Failure Detection Pair menu    on Globally turns Uplink Failure Detection ON    off Globally turns Uplink Failure Detection OFF  This is the default    cur Displays the current Uplink Failure Detection configuration parameters     Failure Detection Pair configuration    Command   cfg ufd fdp  lt FDP number gt      FDP 1 Menu   ltm Link to Monitor Menu  ltd Link to Disable Menu    ena Enable FDP  dis Disable FDP  current Display current FDP configuration          Use these commands to configure a Failure Detection Pair  which consists of one Link to Monitor  LtM  and one  Link to Disable  LtD   When the switch detects a failure on the LtM  it automatically disables the ports in the LtD     The following table describes the Failure Detection Pair  FDP  configuration Menu options     Table 179 Failure Detection Pair Configuration Menu options                Command Description   ltm Displays the Links to Monitor menu    ltd Displays the Links to Disable menu    ena Enables the FDP Parameters    dis Disables the FDP Parameters  This is the default   current Displays the current FDP configuration     N8406 
262. ximum distance to trace  1 16 devices    e msec delay  optional  is the number of milliseconds to wait for the response        pwd    Displays the command path used to reach the current menu        verbose n    Sets the level of information displayed on the screen    e 0   Quiet  Nothing displays except errors  not even prompts      1   Normal  Prompts and requested output are shown  but no menus   e 2   Verbose  Everything is shown  This is the default    e When used without a value  the current setting is displayed           telnet This command is used to Telnet out of the switch  The format is   telnet  lt hostname gt     lt IP address gt   port   history Displays the history of the last ten commands        N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  13    Table 4 Global commands          Command Action   pushd Remembers the current location in the directory of menu commands   popd Returns to the last pushd location    who Displays users who are logged in     Command line history and editing    Using the command line interface  you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few  keystrokes  The following options are available globally at the command line     Table 5 Command line history and editing options          Option Description   history Displays a numbered list of the last ten previously entered commands   da Repeats the last entered command    In Repeats the nth command shown on the history list         lt Ctrl p gt or  Up
263. y a TCP implementation for the retransmission  timeout  measured in milliseconds  More refined semantics for objects of this type  depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout  In  particular  when the timeout algorithm is rsre 3   an object of this type has the  semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793        tcpMaxConn    The limit on the total number of TCP connections the switch can support  In entities  where the maximum number of connections is dynamic  this object should contain  the value  1        tcpActiveOpens    The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN   SENT state from the CLOSED state        tcpPassiveOpens    The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN   RCVD state from the LISTEN state        tcpAttemptFails    The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED  state from either the SYN SENT state or the SYN RCVD state  plus the number of  times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the  SYN RCVD state           tcpEstabResets    The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED  state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE  WAIT state        tcpInSegs    The total number of segments received  including those received in error  This count  includes segments received on currently established connections        tcpOutSegs    The total number of segments sen
264. y on the screen at one time  The default is 24  lines  When used without a value  the current setting is displayed    diff Shows any pending configuration changes that have not been applied   diff flash displays all pending configuration changes that have been applied but  not saved to flash memory  NVRAM   as well as those that have not been applied    apply Applies pending configuration changes    save Saves the active configuration to backup  and saves the current configuration as active   save n saves the current configuration as active  without saving the active  configuration to backup    revert Removes changes that have been made  but not applied     revert apply removes all changes that have not been saved        exit or quit    Exits from the command line interface and logs out        ping    Verifies station to station connectivity across the network  The format is    ping  lt host name gt     lt IP address gt     lt number of tries gt      lt msec delay gt          IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device    e number of tries  optional  is the number of attempts  1 32     e msec delay  optional  is the number of milliseconds between attempts        traceroute    Identifies the route used for station to station connectivity across the network  The  format is    traceroute  lt host name gt     lt IP address gt    lt max hops gt     lt msec  delay gt  J      IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station    e max hops  optional  is the ma
265. yToGroup table information  community table information  targetAddr table information  targetParams table information   notify table information   all SNMPv3 information       SNMP version 3  SNMPv3  is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by    supporting the following       a new SNMP message format      security for messages       access control      remote configuration of SNMP parameters  For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture  see RFC2271 to RFC2276     N8406 023 1Gb Intelligent L3 Switch Command Reference Guide  AOS  21    The following table describes the SNMPv3 Information Menu options     Table 8 SNMPv3 Information Menu options                               Command Usage   usm Displays User Security Model  USM  table information    view Displays information about view name  subtrees  mask and type of view    access Displays View based Access Control information    group Displays information about the group that includes the security model  user name  and  group name    comm Displays information about the community table    taddr Displays the Target Address table    tparam Displays the Target parameters table    notify Displays the Notify table    dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information        SNMPv3 USM User Table information    Command   info sys snmpv3 usm    usmUser Table   User Name    adminmd5  adminsha  viv2only    Protocol    HMAC MD5  DES PRIVACY  HMAC SHA  DES PRIVACY  NO AUTH  NO PRIVACY          The User based Security 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
TUBE ISLAND Range Hood Hotte    Condair PH15 manuel  Network selection methods and apparatus with home network  User Notes - Talbot Stevens  MPC8610 Chip Errata  Lenovo MT 2369 User's Manual  Hewlett Packard Enterprise InfiniBand FDR/EN 10/40Gb Dual Port 544M Adapter  Butterfly 130-1 - Automatismes Jaume    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file